LINES 93 Applying lines to the score 93 To apply a line to just one note 93 To apply a line across a range of notes 93 To apply a line from a note to the end of that measure 93 To apply a line across a range of measures 93 Lines and playback properties 94 Adjust vertical position 94 Change length 94 Text lines 94 Custom lines 94 Copying lines 95 Extended ornament lines 95 External links 95

MEASURE RESTS 95 Full measure rest 95 To create one or more full measure rests 95 To create a full measure rest in a particular voice 95 Multimeasure rest 95 To display multimeasure rests 95 Break multimeasure rest 96

14 Customize parts 203 Add instruments to a part 203 Remove instruments from a part 203 Select staves for an instrument 203 Select voices for an instrument 204 Delete a Part 204 Export parts 204 Save parts 204 Print a part 204

How to run MuseScore 2.x on Mac OS X 10.6

How to change the language in MuseScore

Install on Linux

As of MuseScore 2.0.3 you can, for the first time, get hold of a copy for Linux straight from thedownload page, just likeWindows and Mac users. This is possible thanks to the AppImage packaging format, which runs on pretty much all Linuxdistributions. If you prefer, there is still the option to get it the traditional way via your distribution's package manager (butyou may have to wait for it to get packaged by the relevant maintainer). Of course, you can always build from source .

AppImage

The AppImage format is a new way of packaging Linux applications. AppImages are portable - they don't have to beinstalled - and they run on pretty much any Linux distribution. Dependencies are included in the one AppImage file.

Step 1 - Download

Before you download an AppImage, you need to know your processor's architecture. These terminal commands will showit:

Now you can head over to the download page and find the AppImage that best matches your architecture. Oncedownloaded, the file will be named "MuseScore-X.Y.Z-$(arch).AppImage".

Step 2 - Give execute permission

Before you can use the AppImage you need to give permission for it to be run as a program.

From the Terminal:

This command gives the user (u) permission to execute (x) the AppImage. It works on all Linux systems.

cd ~/Downloads chmod u+x MuseScore*.AppImage

Note: Use the "cd" command to change directory to wherever you saved the AppImage.

From a File Manager:

If you prefer to avoid the command line, there is usually a way give execute permission from inside a File Manager.

In GNOME Files (Nautilus), simply:

1. Right-click on the AppImage and select "Properties".

2. Open the "Permissions" tab. 3. Enable the option labelled "Allow executing file as a program".

The process may be slightly different in other file managers.

Step 3 - Run it!

Now you should be able to run the program simply by double-clicking on it!

When you downloaded the AppImage it was probably saved in your Downloads folder, but you can move somewhere elseit at any time (e.g. you could put it on your desktop for easy access). If you ever want to remove it then simply delete it.

Installing the AppImage (optional)

You can run the AppImage without installing it, but you must install it if you want it to be completely integrated with yourdesktop environment. This has the following benefits:

Adds the AppImage to your Applications Menu or Launcher

To install it, run the AppImage from the Terminal with the "install" option s( ee immediately below). This copies a desktopfile and various icons to your computer. If you want to remove them you will need to run the "remove" option before youdelete the AppImage. This does not affect any scores created with any version of MuseScore.

Using command line options

Running the AppImage from the Terminal allows you to use various command line options. The AppImage has somespecial options in addition to MuseScore's normal command line options.

You will need to change directory (cd) to wherever the AppImage is saved your system, for example:

cd ~/Desktop ./MuseScore*.AppImage [option...]

Or give the path to the AppImage:

~/desktop/MuseScore*.AppImage [option...]

Use the "--help" and "man" options to get more information about the available command line options:

1. Import the GPG key:

2. Go to the download page of the MuseScore website. Click on the link for the stable Fedora download and choose the correct rpm package for your architecture.

3. Depending on your architecture, use one of the two sets of commands to install MuseScore

for arch i386

su yum localinstall musescore-X.Y-1.fc10.i386.rpm

for arch x86_64

su yum localinstall musescore-X.Y-1.fc10.x86_64.rpm

If you have difficulty with sound, see Fedora 11 and sound .

See also the hints for the various distributions on the download page .

External links

How to run the MuseScore AppImage on Linux - video

Install on Chromebook

Desktop program

MuseScore's desktop program will not work natively on Chrome OS, but there are some workaround solutions:

1. Since Chrome OS 69, certain chromebook models are able to run Linux apps and so you can install MuseScore for Linux as provided on our Download page . Feedback about the installation process and supported hardware is welcome on the forum

2. Via software-on-demand service such as rollApp : By just visiting this website, you can run MuseScore in the browser. You can access your scores via cloud services such as Google Drive or save them to your online MuseScore account through the menu File→Save Online.... Note that currently, sound and playback does not work on rollApp.

3. Via Crouton : Involves installing a Linux based operating system which runs in parallel with Chrome OS, and then installing MuseScore on Linux.

Android app (playback only)

Alternatively, it is possible to install MuseScore's Android app on recent Chromebooks. You will need to update to thelatest version of Chrome OS first. See the Chromebook support documentation for help installing Android apps onChromebooks , and a list of supported devices . The app only supports playback of existing scores, not score editingor creation, but you can sign-in to your MuseScore account for easy access to all your scores on MuseScore.com.

External links

How to run the MuseScore AppImage on Linux - video

How to run MuseScore on a Chromebook Check the installation procedure from the comments in this thread

Language, translations, and extensions

30MuseScore works with your "System" language (the one used for most programs, and generally depending on yourcountry and the language settings of the PC, or account).

2. In the General tab, select the desired language from the drop-down list in theLanguage section:

Resource Manager

The Resource Manager is used to install and uninstall extensions, and to handle the update of translations. To accessthe menu use one of the following options:

From the menu bar, select Help→Resource Manager .

From the menu bar, select Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...), open the General tab, and click on the Update translations button.

31Install/uninstall extension

To install or uninstall an extension:

1. Select the Extensions tab in the Resource Manager.

2. Select the extension. 3. Click the Install or Uninstall button.

Note: Extensions currently include the MuseScore Drumline (MDL) (as of version 3.0) and the MuseScore General HQsoundfont (as of version 3.1).

Update translations

To update translation(s):

1. Select the Languages tab in the Resource Manager.

2. Click on the Update buttons for the language(s) you want to update.

Note: The language of menus and dialogs will be changed immediately, but the Inspector won't use the new language ortranslations until the program is restarted.

See also

Helping to improve translation

External links

How to change the language in MuseScore

Checking for updates

Note: These options are only available in the Mac and Windows versions of MuseScore (except the version from theWindows Store), as only those can be updated directly from MuseScore.org. Linux distributions (and the Windows Store)have different mechanisms to make updates available.

For the versions of MuseScore that can be directly updated, there are two ways to check for updates.

2. Select the Update tab. 3. Ensure the box marked "Check for new version of MuseScore" is ticked. (It should be ticked by default):

If you enable this option, MuseScore will check for updates on every start. On the Mac and Windows versions (excluding the Windows Store version), this option enables an auto-updater that will download and install updates automatically.

Check for update

1. From the menu, select Help→Check for Update :

2. A dialog will appear with the update status: either "No Update Available" or "An update for MuseScore is available:" followed by a link to download it.

See also

Preferences: Update

BasicsThe previous →"Getting started" chapter guided you through the installation process. The "Basics" chapter gives anoverview of MuseScore and describes the general methods for interacting with the score.

Create a new score

To create a new score, open the New Score Wizard (see Create new score, below): this can also be accessed via theStart Center.

Start Center

This is the window that displays when you open MuseScore for the very first time:

33To open the Start Center (if not already visible), use any of the following options:

Press F4. From the menu bar, select File→Start Center...

From the Start Center you can:

Create a new score (by clicking on the icon with the plus sign). View thumbnails of previously-opened scores: click on a thumbnail to open it. Open a score from your computer's file system: click onOpen a score ... Open the "Getting Started" tutorial score. Use the arrow buttons in the right-hand pane to access the link. Search sheet music on musecore.com . Access various other facilities (see right-hand pane).

Create new score

To open the New Score Wizard when the Start Center is not open, use one of the following options:

Click on the New Score icon in the toolbar on the top left of the window; Use keyboard shortcut Ctrl+N (Mac: Cmd+N); From the menu, select File→New....

Enter score information

34Step 1: Enter score information.

Enter the title, composer, or any other information as shown above, then click onNext > . This step is optional: you can alsoadd this information after the score is created (see Vertical frame).

Choose template file

Step 2: Choose template file.

In the left column is a list of solo, ensemble and orchestraltemplates, divided into categories according to musical style. Ifyou have previously stored any custom templates in your user templates folder, these are displayed under the heading,"Custom Templates". You can also use the Search bar (top left) to find specific templates.

To choose a score template:

Click on the name of a score template to select it, then clickNext > ; alternatively, just double-click the score template name. This will automatically take you to the next page of the Wizard (see Choose key signature and tempo, below).

35 If you wish to create a score template from scratch, click on "Choose Instruments" (under "General"), then click Next > ; alternatively, just double-click "Choose instruments."

Choose instruments (or voice parts)

The Choose Instruments window is divided into two columns:

The left column contains a list of instruments, or voice parts to choose from. This list is categorized into instrument families, and clicking a category shows the full list of instruments in each family.

The default entry is "Common instruments" but you can choose from others, including "Jazz instruments" and "Early music". There is a search box at the bottom of the instrument window: typing the name of an instrument there will search for it in "All instruments".

The right column starts off empty, but will eventually contain a list of instruments for your new score in the order that they will appear.

Add instruments

To add instruments to the score, use any of the following options:

Select one or more instruments in the left column and clickAdd.

Double-click an instrument in the left column.

The instrument names, and their associated staff lines, now appear in the list of instruments in the right column. You canadd more instruments or voice parts, as needed. Each instrument added in this way is allocated its own Mixer channel.

Note: If you want staves to share the same instrument, use theAdd staff or Add linked staff commands instead (seebelow).

Add Staff / Add Linked Staff

To add a staff to an existing instrument in the score:

1. Select a staff in the score list on the right-hand side (e.g. see "Staff 1" in the image below). ClickAdd Staff or Add Linked Staff. 2. Adjust the Staff type, if applicable.

See also, Combine pitched staff with tablature.

Change order of instruments

To change the order of instruments (or staves) in the score:

Click either an instrument name or a staff, in the right-hand column, and use the arrow buttons to move it higher/lower.

Delete an instrument

To delete an instrument, or staff line, from the score

Select an instrument, or a staff line, in the right-hand column, and clickRemove.

Choose key signature and tempo

37Step 3: Choose key signature and tempo.

The wizard asks for two things: The initial key signature and tempo of the score. Select any of the former and clickNext >to continue. An initial tempo can be set here too.

Choose time signature, pickup measure, and number of measures

Step 4: Choose time signature etc.

You can set your initial time signature here. If the score starts with apickup measure (also known as an anacrusis orupbeat measure), then mark the Pickup measure checkbox and adjust the "Duration" accordingly.

Measures is set to 32 by default: you can change the number here, or add/remove measures later from the score.

Click Finish to create your new score.

Adjustments to score after creation

Any settings you make in the New Score Wizard can always be changed when you start work on the score itself:

Add / delete / adjust measures

Add text (Text basics).

Edit text.

Change instrument set-up

To add, delete, or change the order of instruments:

From the menu, select Edit→Instruments...; or use the keyboard shortcut, I. This opens the Instruments dialog which is virtually identical to the Choose Instruments dialog in the New Score Wizard (see above).

See also Change instrument (Staff properties).

Hide a staff

To hide a staff permanently: Open the Instruments dialog (I) and untick the "Visible" box for that staff. To hide a staff under certain conditions: See the "Hide" options in theScore dialog, and Staff Properties.

Adjust layout and formatting

To adjust the distance between staves and systems, set page margins etc., seeLayout and formatting.

Templates

A Template is simply a standard MuseScore file that has been stored in one of two "templates" folders: any files in thesefolders are automatically displayed on the "Choose template file" page of the New Score Wizard. Two templates foldersare created by default:

A system templates folder.

A user templates folder.

System templates folder

This folder contains the templates installed with MuseScore and shouldnot be modified. It can be found in the followinglocations:

Windows: Usually at C:\Program Files\MuseScore 3\templates .

Linux: Under /usr/share/mscore-xxx if you installed from the package manager. If you compiled MuseScore on Linux yourself,then look under /usr/local/share/mscore-xxx (with xxx being the version you are using).

User templates folder

Any templates that you create for future use should be stored here. Once in the user "templates" folder, they willautomatically appear on the "Choose template file" page of the New Score Wizard—under the heading "CustomTemplates".

The default location of the user templates folder is as follows:

Windows: %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Templates.

MacOS and Linux: ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Templates.

To configure the location of your private templates folder:

From the menu, select Edit→Preferences...→General.

39See also

Key signature Time signature Clef Tempo Staff properties

External links

Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 1 - Score Setup

Note input

MuseScore allows you to enter music notation from any of four input devices: computer keyboard, mouse, MIDI keyboard,or virtual piano keyboard. The default input mode is step-time, in which notes or rests are entered one at a time.However, other input modes are also available.

After exiting the New Score Wizard, your new score will consist of a series of measures filled with measure rests:

As you enter notes in a measure, the measure rests are changed to appropriate rests to fill the remainder of the measure:

Notes of different durations on the same beat are entered by usingvoices:

Basic note entry

This section introduces you to the basics of entering notes and rests instep-time from a computer keyboard. It is alsorecommended that you work through the tutorial, "Getting Started: An introduction to note entry in MuseScore". This isavailable from the Start Center.

Step 1. Select a starting position

Select a starting position for note input by clicking on a note or rest, orselecting a measure, with the mouse. If you don'tselect a starting point, the cursor automatically defaults to the beginning of the score when you enter Note Input mode("Step 2" below).

Step 2. Enter Note Input mode

To enter Note Input mode, use either of the following options:

Click on the "N" icon (on the extreme left of theNote Input toolbar). Press N on your computer keyboard.

To exit Note Input mode, use any of the following options:

Press N. Press Esc. Click on the toolbar "N" button.

Step 3. Select a duration

Still in Note Input mode, select a note duration using either of the following:

41Note: The duration selected in the toolbar applies to both notesand rests.

If you want to enter a dotted note, press . (period/full stop) after selecting the duration.

For example, after entering Note Input mode, type: 5 . C 4 D E F G A.

If you want to enter a tuplet (such as a triplet): seeTuplets.

If you want to write music with two or more simultaneous lines of independent melody (i.e. polyphony): seeVoices.

Move notes up/down

To move a note up or down by a semitone:

Press the ↑ or ↓ arrow.

To move a note up or down diatonically:

Press Alt+Shift+↑ or Alt+Shift+↓ .

To move a note up or down by one octave:

Press Ctrl+↑ (Mac: ⌘+↑ ) or Ctrl+↓ (Mac: ⌘+↓ ).

Add accidentals

When a note is moved up or down with an arrow key (see above), any accidental required is automatically generated bythe program. Accidentals can also be added manually—see Accidentals.

Chords

If you want to add a chord note above your previous entry:

Press and hold Shift, then enter a note from A to G.

Thus, typing C, D, Shift+F, Shift+A, E, F results in:

To add a note at a specific interval above or below one or more notes:

1. Ensure that one or more notes are selected;

2. Use one of the following options: From the menu, select Add→Intervals and chose an interval from the list; Press Alt+1-9 for intervals above (intervals below are also possible by adding relevant shortcuts to the list in Preferences).

Note: To create chords with notes of different durations, you will need to use more than oneVoice.

Insert notes

Normally, when you enter music in MuseScore, any existing notes or rests are overwritten. There are, however, severalways to insert notes:

Insert extra measures into the score.

Cut and paste a section of the score forward, then enter music into the gap.

42 To insert a note, press Ctrl + Shift (Mac: ⌘ + Shift) + the note name (A to G). This will insert a note of the selected duration and move the rest of the notes to the right in the same measure. If the measure exceeds the duration of the time signature, the blue plus will appear above the measure as in Insert Mode.

Delete notes

To delete a single note:

Select the note and press Delete .

To delete a chord:

1. Press Esc to ensure that you are in Normal mode.

2. Press Shift and click on a note to select the chord. 3. Press Delete .

The delete command can also be applied to a range of notes/chords.

Keyboard shortcuts

Here is a list of useful editing shortcuts available in Note Input mode:

↑ (Up): Increase the pitch of a note by a semitone (uses ♯).

↓ (Down): Decrease the pitch of a note by a semitone (uses ♭). Alt+1-9: Add interval (unison to ninth) above current note. J : Change a note up or down to its enharmonic equivalent (e.g. D♯ to E♭). This alters the spelling in both concert pitch and transposed modes. See Accidentals. Ctrl+J (Mac Cmd+J ): Change a note up or down to its enharmonic equivalent. This alters the spelling only in the current mode. See Accidentals Alt+Shift+↑ : Increase the pitch of a note using key signature Alt+Shift+↓ : Decrease the pitch of a note using key signature R: Repeat the last entered note Q: Halve the duration of the last entered note W: Double the duration of the last entered note Shift+Q: Decrease duration by a dot (for example, a dotted quarter note/crotchet becomes a quarter note/crotchet and a quarter note/crotchet becomes a dotted eighth note/quaver). Shift+W: Increase duration by a dot (for example an eighth note/quaver becomes a dotted eighth note/quaver and a dotted eighth note/quaver becomes a quarter note/crotchet). Backspace : Undo last entered note Shift+←: Exchange last entered note with the note before it (repeat to keep moving note earlier) Shift+→: Exchange note moved with Shift+← with the note that follows it X : Flip direction of note stem (can be reset to Auto position inInspector) Shift+X : Move note head to opposite side of stem (can be reset to Auto position inInspector)

Mouse

It's easy to enter notes with the mouse, but it is not the fastest way to enter lots of notes.

2. Click on the score to add a pitch of the selected duration. 3. To add more notes to an existing chord, simply repeat step 2. 4. To replace an existing chord (rather than adding to it), pressShift before clicking.

Note: If you hover the cursor over the score in Note Input Mode it will show you a preview of the note or rest you areabout to add.

MIDI keyboard

You can also insert pitches using a MIDI keyboard.

1. Connect your MIDI keyboard to the computer and switch the former on 2. Start MuseScore (this must be done after the keyboard is switched on) 3. Create a new score 4. Click the rest (selecting it) in measure 1 to indicate where you want note input to begin

2. Click on the I/O tab and select your device under the section labeled "MIDI input". 3. Click OK to exit. You will need to restart MuseScore to apply the change.

Virtual Piano Keyboard

You can also input notes using the on-screenpiano keyboard.

To toggle the display on and off: Press P (or select View→Piano).

To resize the keyboard: Position the mouse pointer over the piano keys, hold downCtrl (Mac: Cmd) and move the mouse scroll wheel up (larger) or down (smaller).

The method of note entry is similar to that for a midi keyboard:

1. Ensure that you are in Note Input mode.

2. To enter a: Single note: Click on the appropriate piano key. Chord: Select the note you wish to add to, press and holdShift, then click on a piano key (in versions before 2.1, use Ctrl (Mac: Cmd)). Repeat as required.

Note input modes

MuseScore offers a variety of note input modes in addition to Step-time. All can be accessed by clicking the small arrownext to the "N" button on the left of the Note Input toolbar:

Step-time (default): The default mode of note entry. SeeBasic note entry (above). Repitch: Replace pitches without changing rhythms. Rhythm: Enter durations with a single click or keypress. Real-time (automatic): Perform the piece at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome beat. Real-time (manual): Perform the piece while tapping a key or pedal to set the beat. Insert: (Called "Timewise" until version 3.0.2) Insert and delete notes and rests within measures, automatically shifting subsequent music forwards or backwards.

Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range

Depending on the skill of the musician, certain notes are considered beyond the range of a particular instrument. Forinformational purposes, MuseScore optionally colors notes red if they are outside the range of a "professional" player, andolive green/dark yellow if outside the range of an "early amateur." The colors appear on the computer screen, but not onprinted copies.

Small notes/small noteheads

1. Select the note(s) you want in small size.

2. Check the "Small" checkbox in the Inspector. The one in the Note section is used to only change the size of the individual notehead; the one in the Chord section will change the note head, stem, beam, and flag sizes all together.

By default, the small size is 70% of the normal size. You can change that setting inFormat → Style…→Sizes.

Change notes or rests already entered

Change duration

To change the length of a single note or rest:

1. Make sure you are not in note input mode (press Esc to exit) and have no other notes selected. 2. Click on the note or rest and use the duration shortcuts listedabove, or the duration icons in the toolbar, to change it to the duration of your choice.

Increasing the duration will overwrite the notes or rests that follow it; decreasing the duration will add rests between it andthe notes or rests following.

For example, to change three sixteenth rests into a single dotted eighth rest:

1. Click on the first sixteenth rest.

2. Hit 4 to turn it into an eighth rest. 3. Hit . to turn it into a dotted eighth rest.

As the duration increases, it overwrites the other two sixteenth rests following it.

Change pitch

To change the pitch of a single note:

1. Make sure that you're not in note input mode and that you have no other notes selected. 2. Select the desired note and use any of the following methods: Drag the notehead up or down with the mouse; Press the keyboard arrows: ↑ (Up) or ↓ (down); Type a new note letter name (A…G). Use Ctrl+↓ or Ctrl+↑ to correct the octave, if necessary (Mac: Cmd+↓ or Cmd+↑ ). This will automatically turn on note input mode.

To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, select it and use theJ command. For more information, see Accidentals.

To change the pitches of a passage of music by a constant interval, you can useTransposition.

To change the pitches of a passage of music to a different melody, while keeping the rhythm unchanged, useRe-pitchmode.

Change rest to note and vice versa

To change a rest to a note of the same duration:

45 1. Make sure you are not in note input mode (press Esc to exit). 2. Select the rest. 3. Enter the desired pitch by entering a note letter,A–G.

To change a note to a rest of the same duration:

1. Make sure you are not in note input mode (press Esc to exit). 2. Select the note. 3. Press 0 (Zero).

Note properties

To adjust the horizontal position of a note/chord: see Offset notes.

To edit note properties in general (spacing, offset, size, color, notehead direction, playback etc.): seeInspector and object properties. To adjust the layout of all notes in the score: seeLayout and formatting, especially the sections about notes, accidentals and tuplets.

Edit mode allows you to perform a wide range of editing operations on individual score elements, such as:

Adjust the length and shape of slurs, lines, barlines etc.

Add, delete and format text in text objects. Adjust the position of most score elements (but not text).

Enter/exit edit mode

To enter Edit mode use any of the following methods:

Double-click an element. Right-click on an element and, from the menu, select Edit Element. Click on an element and press Alt+Shift+E.

To exit Edit mode use any of the following:

Press Esc. Click on a blank area of the document window.

Text

For text edit mode , see Text editing.

46Lines

See Lines: Change length, and Adjust slur.

Notes

Offset notes

Sometimes it is necessary to shift a note to the right or left—to avoid a collision with another element or to overrideautomatic notehead sharing for example:

1. Enter Edit mode on the desired note;

2. Press the arrow key in the direction (left or right) that you wish to nudge the note (or use Ctrl+← or Ctrl+→ for larger adjustments); 3. Press the Esc key. This will allow the note stem to be redrawn.

Alternatively, you can select the notehead and change the "Horizontal offset" (under "Chord") in theInspector.

The following commands only apply to adjustment handles:

Shift+←:Move end handle's anchor left by one note/rest.

Shift+→:Move end handle's anchor right by one note/rest. Tab: Go to next handle.

To undo all edits, ensure you are not in edit mode and press Ctrl+R.

See also

Text editing Slur Bracket Line Beam Hairpin

47Palettes

To the left of the document window is the palette area: aPalette is a folder containing musical symbols (usually related)which can be applied to the score. Together, the palettes form the main part of a workspace.

To view or hide the palettes:

From the menu, select View → Palettes; or use the keyboard shortcut, F9.

Single Palette Mode

If you only want to allow one palette to open at a time, right click at the top of the workspace and check the "Singlepalette" box. This will cause a palette to automatically close when you open a different one.

Open/close palette

Click once on the name of the palette or its accompanying side-arrow.

Apply symbols from a palette

A palette symbol may be applied to the score using one of the following methods:

Select one or more score elements and double click the palette symbol. Drag and drop the symbol onto the desired score element in the staff.

Tip: To prevent accidental rearrangement of contents during use, right-click over a palette name and untick "EnableEditing."

For example, to add tenuto marks (—) to a selection of notes:

1. Select the desired notes.

2. In the Articulations & Ornaments palette, double-click on the tenuto symbol

Once added to the score, objects can be copied, pasted, and duplicated—seeCopy and paste.

Custom palettes

Once you have created a custom workspace, and enabled editing (see Palette menu below), you can customize thepalettes within it to your own requirements.

To add an existing score element (such as a line, text, dynamic, fretboard diagram etc.) to a custom palette:

Press and hold Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift), then drag the symbol onto the palette.

To add a symbol to a custom workspace from the Master palette:

48 Drag the symbol from the Master Palette window into a custom palette.

To re-arrange a symbol in a custom palette:

Drag the symbol to the cell you want it to display in while pressingShift: it will swap places with the symbol currently occupying that cell.

Palette menu

Right-clicking on the name of a palette in a custom workspace brings up this menu:

Palette Properties...: Adjust the appearance of the open palette:

Name Cell Size: Width, Height Element Offset: Adjust the vertical offset of all elements in the palette. Scale: Make all palette elements appear larger or smaller. Show grid: Visually divide the palette into cells, one for each element. Show ‘More Elements…’: Create a cell which opens the Master Palette. Insert New Palette: Create a new empty palette. Move Palette Up / Move Palette Down: Reorder the palettes. Enable Editing: Allow modifying the contents of the palette. Save Palette: Save as an .mpal file. Load Palette: Load an .mpal file. Delete Palette: Remove the palette from the workspace entirely.

Right-clicking on an element within a palette (if editing of the palette is enabled) brings up this menu:

Clear: Remove the element from the palette

Properties...: Open the Palette Cell Properties dialogue: Name: The tooltip that appears when you mouse over the element. Content offset (X, Y): Adjust the position of the element in the palette. Content scale: Make the element appear larger or smaller in the palette. Draw staff: Draw the five lines of a musical staff behind the palette element. More Elements: Open the relevant Master Palette section.

Note: Changing values in "Palette Cell Properties" only affects the appearance of elements in the palette. It does notchange their sizes or offsets on the score page.

Behavior of applied text and lines

If the symbol you are adding to the score from a palette contains atext element (e.g. staff text, dynamic, fingering, voltaetc.), then properties such as font-type, font-size, text color, and alignment will adapt according to the following rules:

1. Text properties which have not been altered by the user will adopt the relevant, prevailingtext styles.

2. Custom text-properties—i.e. those changed by the user before saving the symbol to a custom palette—remain as customized.

By contrast, the line properties of lines applied from a palette always remain unchanged (i.e. as set by the user beforesaving to a custom workspace, or as predefined in the Basic/Advanced workspaces).

See also

49 Master palette

Workspaces

The workspace consists of several components, the main one being the palette area, situated to the left of the documentwindow.

Each palette is a folder containing musical symbols (usually related) which can be applied to the score. Click on thepalette name to open and close it.

To view or hide the palette area of the workspace:

Press, F9; alternatively, from the menu, select View → Palettes.

MuseScore provides two preset workspaces: Basic (the default option) and Advanced (a version with more palettes andsymbols). These contain symbols drawn from the various sections of the Master palette. In addition, you can create yourown custom workspaces (below).

Switch between workspaces

Select a new workspace from the drop-down menu at the bottom of the workspace panel; alternatively, selectView → Workspaces, and click on one of the options.

Docking/undocking

To dock or undock a workspace, see Side panels.

Create a custom workspace

The Basic and Advanced workspaces are preset and cannot be changed by the user. However, MuseScore allows you tocreate your own workspaces which are fully editable:

To create a customizable workspace:

1. Select an existing workspace: use the drop-down list at the bottom of the workspace panel if required; 2. Click the + button (next to the dropdown list), which displays the following dialog:

50 Note: this can also be opened from the menu:View→Workspace→New; 3. Enter a name for the new workspace; 4. Tick the components that you want joined to the workspace, namely: Toolbars: Allows you to customize the tool button display and the order in which they are displayed. Access this via View→Toolbars →Customize toolbars. Menu bar: Allows you to change the menus and menu items displayed in the Menu bar. NOT IMPLEMENTED YET; GUI components: Saves information with the workspace about the position of the GUI (Graphical user interface) components, and whether they are open or not. (e.g. Inspector, Timeline); GUI Preferences: Saves the preferences selected for the GUI elements inEdit→Preferences, such as Theme and Canvas settings; 5. Press Save. The new workspace is added to the panel.

To insert, delete, rename and reorder the palettes within a custom workspace; or to edit the palette display; or to enableediting of palette contents: see Palette menu.

To edit the workspace name or to change which components are associated with the workspace:

Select View→Workspace→Edit.

This displays a window with the same options as theCreate New Workspace dialog (above).

Save custom workspace

Any changes you make to the workspaces are automatically saved to the program (no further action required). Eachcustom workspace is saved as a separate file in a folder called "Workspaces": the location depends on your computerplatform (for details see under 'For advanced users').

See also

Palettes Master palette

Inspector

Displaying the Inspector

The Inspector appears by default on the right of your screen. To show or hide it:

From the menu, select View and check or uncheck Inspector; alternatively, use the shortcut F8 (Mac: fn+F8).

To undock the Inspector panel:

Click the double-chevron symbol or double-click the top bar of the panel.

To re-attach the panel double-click on the top bar again. See also:Side panels.

51What the Inspector does

When you select any object in the score window, its properties are automatically displayed in theInspector where theycan be edited. Multiple elements can also be selected and edited together—as long as they are of the same type.However, if the selected objects are of different types, then the Inspector restricts you to editing color, visibility, andautomatic placement only.

"Reset to style default" and "Set to style" buttons

When you select a score object, two types of buttons are clearly visible on the right-hand side of the Inspector:

Reset to style default: . Press this button to reset a particular property to the default value—i.e. the one shown in the Style menu.

Set as style: . Press this button to make the value of a particular property the new default for the style. This will update the Style menu and all other objects governed by that style.

Note: You can also edit styles directly from theStyle menu.

Inspector categories

Properties are conveniently listed under categories in the Inspector. Categories can be identified by their bold lettering.For example, if you select a barline, you will see the following displayed at the top of the Inspector:

For details of the various categories and their properties, see below:

Element

All score elements—except frames, breaks and spacers—display this category in the Inspector when selected. Theoptions are as follows:

Visible: Uncheck this box to make selected elements invisible; alternatively, use the shortcut V (toggle). Invisible elements do not appear in the music when printed out or exported as a PDF or image. If you still want them to remain on display in the document window, make sure that the "Show Invisible" option is selected in View → Show Invisible. Invisible elements will then be colored light gray.

Color: Click on the rectangle to open a "Color Select" dialog. Adjust the color and opacity of selected elements.

Automatic placement: See Automatic placement.

Minimum distance: Minimum distance from other elements when automatic placement is enabled.

Offset X/Y: Allows you to position selected elements exactly (in terms of space units). A positive number moves the elements right or down; a negative number moves the elements left or up. Snap to grid buttons are also provided.

Stacking order (Z): See Automatic placement: Stacking order

Element Group

52This category is displayed only when you have selected a mixture of different types of elements, and allows editing ofcolor, visibility, and automatic placement only.

Segment

Leading Space: Use this to increase or decrease the space before an element. This also affects any associated lyric syllables.

Chord

Offset X/Y: This changes the positon of every note in the same voice as the selected note(s). If you want to make changes to the position of just one note, use the Element category instead). Small: Make noteheads and stem small. Stemless: Make chord stemless. Stem direction: Choice of Auto, Up, or Down.

Note

This category allows you to make changes to selected notes (but for note position—seeElement). It contains thefollowing properties:

Small: Make notehead smaller (you can specify the relative size of all small notes from the menu:Format → Style… → Sizes…). Head group: See Notehead groups. Head type: See Notehead types. Mirror head: Position notehead to the left or right of the stem (default is "Auto"). Fix to line: When ticked, the note is fixed to the top line of the standard 5-line staff. Line: A positive number moves the "fixed" note down; a negative number moves it upwards. Play: Unticking this box silences the note. Tuning: Adjust tuning of note to the nearestcent. Velocity type: Sets the MIDI velocity of notes directly. Chose one of two options: Offset: Make the value shown in "Velocity"relative to the previous dynamic marking. User: Make the value shown in "Velocity"absolute (i.e. the MIDI velocity is unaffected by dynamic markings). Velocity: Set the MIDI velocity according to the option displayed in "Velocity type."

Select

This category appears differently according to the selection you have made:

If you select a notehead, the "Select" category displays buttons which allow you to easily switch the selection to the stem, beam, hook, duration dot (or dots) or tuplet number associated with the notehead (see image below).

If you select a range of measures, the "Select" category allows you to select either allnotes, grace notes, or rests.

Beam

This section is displayed in the Inspector when you select one or more notebeams, and allows you to make fineadjustments to beam position and angle, and also change the spacing of beamed notes.

Clef

This section appears when you select a clef: the tick box allows you to turn on/off the display of a precedingcourtesy clef.

Articulation

This category appears when you select an articulation or ornament. The following options are available:

53 Direction: Whether the symbol points up or down: only applicable to certain symbols. Anchor: The vertical placement of the symbol: Play: Turn on/off playback effect. Time stretch: Only applicable to fermatas. Allows you to vary the pause in playback. Ornament style: A choice of default or Baroque playback.

Fretboard diagram

See Fretboard diagrams.

Line

This category is displayed when a line is selected. Here, you can set various general properties.

Visible: Hide or display just the line: any text remains visible. Allow diagonal: The default is horizontal (unticked). Tick if you want to edit the line to create a slope. Line color/thickness/style: Set various properties of the line.

Text Line Details

This category is displayed when a line is selected. It allows you to set the wording of a line, edit text properties, set linehooks, and align the text in relation to the line.

Begin Text / Continue Text / End Text: Refers to text at the very beginning of the line; at the beginning of any continuation line; or at the end of the very last line. All have the same properties, as follows:

Text: Create or edit the text associated with the line.

Font face / Size / Style: Set the text properties, and/or edit the text style of the line. Align: Set the horizontal and vertical alignment of the text in relation to the line. Placement: Place the text on (Above/Below), or to the left of the line. Offset X / Y: Adjust the x and y offsets for exact positioning.

Properties dialogs

Some object types have additional properties. These are accessed by right-clicking on the object and choosing a "...properties" option from the context menu. The settings available in these dialogs are explained in the description of theobject type in Notation or Advanced topics.See:

Articulations and ornaments

Time signatures Staff and system text Measure operations Staff/Part properties

See also

Note input Layout and formatting Parts

Measure operations

Note: To ensure that inserted or appended measures display correctly, multimeasure rests should be set to off (toggle M).

Select

Single measure

54 To select a single measure, click on a space within the measure.

Range of measures

To select a continuous range of measures, see Shift + click selection and Shift selection.

Insert

Insert an empty measure into the score

Use one of the following options:

Select a measure or a frame, then pressIns (no shortcut on Mac).

Select a measure or a frame, then chose from the menu:Add→Measures→Insert Measure.

Insert multiple measures

Use one of the following options:

Select a measure or a frame, then pressCtrl+Ins (no shortcut on Mac); fill in the "Number of measures to insert" field and press OK. Select a measure or a frame, then chose from the menu:Add→Measures→Insert Measures...; fill in the "Number of measures to insert" field and press OK.

Append

Append an empty measure to the end of a score

Use one of the following options:

Press Ctrl+B (Mac: ⌘+B).

Select from the menu: Add→Measures→Append One Measure .

Append multiple measures to the end of a score

Use one of the following options:

Press Alt+Shift+B (Mac: Option+Shift+B); fill in the "Number of measures to append" field and pressOK. Select from the menu: Add→Measures→Append Measures... ; fill in the "Number of measures to append" field and press OK.

Delete

Delete a single measure

Select the measure, and press Ctrl+Del (Mac: Cmd+Del).

Delete a range of measures

1. Select the range of measures to delete;

2. Press Ctrl+Del (Mac: Cmd+Del).

Notes: (1) In multi-staff scores, measure deletion also removes all corresponding measures in the other staves of thesystem; (2) If you wish to delete only the measure contents (and not the measure itself), use theDel command instead atstep "2."

Properties

To edit the properties of a measure, right-click an empty part of the measure and selectMeasure Properties... :

55You can use the buttons, at the bottom left of the dialog, to navigate to the previous or next measure.

Staves

The visible property allows you to show/hide the notes and staff lines for the current measure. The stemless property allows you to show/hide all note stems for the current measure. Notes that normally have a stem such as half notes (minims) and quarter notes (crotchets) only show the note head when marked as stemless.

Measure duration

This feature allows you to adjust the time signature of a single measure regardless of the time signature indicated in thescore. You can use it to create a pickup measure (also known as anacrusis or upbeat), cadenza, ad lib section etc.

Nominal is the apparent time signature and cannot be edited.

Actual can be set to anything you like regardless of thenominal time signature.

Example: In the image below, the quarter notepickup measure has a nominal time signature of 4/4, but an actual timesig. of 1/4. The measures in the middle are in normal 4/4 time. The complementary measure at the end of the staff, with adotted half note, has an actual time sig. of 3/4.

Other

Exclude from measure count

Use "Exclude from measure count" for "irregular" measures, i.e. ones that should not get counted in the measurenumbering. Normally, a pickup measure is marked as "Exclude from measure count".

Break multi-measure rests

This property will separate a multi-measure rest at the start of the selected measure. This option should be checkedbefore you turn on the "Create multi-measure rests" option in Format→Style...→Score.

Multi-measure rests are automatically broken at important breaks, such as rehearsal marks, time signature changes,double barlines, irregular measures, etc. The default for scores is off, for parts is on.

56Measure number mode

This allows you to control how measure numbers display on the selected measure. Chose "Auto," "Always Show," or"Always Hide" from the dropdown list.

Layout stretch

You can increase or decrease horizontal space between score elements (notes, rests, etc.) with this option. This providesa more precise control over the exact same measure spacing property as the menu commands or keyboard shortcuts forIncrease/Decrease Stretch ({ and }), which are accessed outside of the Measure Properties dialog while a measure isselected.

Add to measure number

You can also use the "Add to measure number" option to influence the measure numbering. You can enter positive ornegative numbers here. Please note that this affects all subsequent measures. A value of "-1" has the same effect asmarking a measure to be excluded from measure count.

Play Count

If a measure precedes an end repeat barline, this value controls the number of times that the repeat section plays back:see also, Repeats and jumps.

Numbering

By default, MuseScore numbers the first measure of each System (except for the first measure in asection), but othernumbering options are available: see Format→Style...→Measure Numbers .

Mark the checkbox next to the "Measure Numbers" ("Bar Numbers") to turn on automatic measure numbers. Mark "Show first" if you want the first measure numbered. Mark "All staves" if you want numbers on all staves. Otherwise, only the top staff of each system shows measure numbers. Choose to show numbers on "Every system", which numbers the first measure of each line; or show numbers by "Interval" and specify the size of the interval. For example, an interval of 1 numbers every measure; an interval of 5 numbers every fifth measure.

Split and join

You may want have to have a longer or shorter measure without changing the time signature. You can change theduration of the measure in Measure Properties, but there is also the option to split or join measures.

Join measures

Method A. To join two measures only:

Select the barline between the two measures and pressCtrl+Del.

Method B. To join any number of measures:

1. Select the measures you want to join;

2. From the menu bar, select Tools→Measure →Join Selected Measures .

Notes: (1) If you select measures on only one staff in a score with multiple staves, the same measures will be joined ineach staff of the system. (2) Beaming may be automatically modified.

Split a measure

Chose one of the following methods:

Select a note; then hold Ctrl and double-click a barline in a palette.

Hold Ctrl and drag a barline (from a palette) to the note that starts the next measure. Select a note; then, from the menu bar, select Tools→Measure →Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest .

Note: If you select only one note from one staff, each staff of the system will be split at the same place.

57External links

How to delete measures

How to span a measure over multiple systems (1.x) How to get scores without time signature (and clef)

Voices

A voice is a musical line or part which can have its own rhythm independently of other voices on thesame staff. Voicesare sometimes called "layers" in other notation software.

You can have up to 4 voices on each staff line. In a polyphonic measure, voice 1 usually takes the up-stem notes andvoice 2 takes the down-stem notes.

N.B. Be careful not to confuse the concept of MuseScore voices (1, 2, 3, 4) with the order of voices found in vocal scores(SATB etc.). In particular, when creating a closed SATB score, use only (MuseScore) voices 1 and 2 for both upperandlower staves. There is no need to use (MuseScore) voices 3 and 4 unless there are more than two parts in the same staff.

How voices are displayed

When to use voices

If you need stems pointing in opposite directions within a chord, on a single staff. If you need notes of different durations within a single staff, played simultaneously.

How to enter notes in different voices

The following instructions show you how to notate a passage of music in two voices:

1. Enter voice 1 notes first: Make sure you are in note input mode : the Voice 1 button becomes highlighted in blue in the toolbar. Enter the notes in the top voice first. When inputting, some notes may have down-stems, but these will flip automatically when the second voice is added.

The following excerpt shows a treble staff with just the voice 1 notes entered:

2. Move cursor back to start of section: When you have finished entering a section of voice 1 notes, press the← key repeatedly to move the cursor, note-by-note, back to the first note of the section; or alternatively use Ctrl+← (Mac:Cmd+←) to move the cursor back one measure at a time. Or else you can simply exitnote input mode (press Esc ) and click directly on the first note.

3. Enter voice 2 notes: Make sure you are in note-input mode and that the voice 1 note at the beginning of the section is selected. Click on the "Voice 2" button (on the right of the toolbar), or use the shortcutCtrl+Alt+2 (Mac: Cmd+Option+2). Enter all the lower voice notes (down-stem).

The following image shows the above example after the addition of voice 2 notes:

58Deleting and hiding rests

All rests can be made invisible, if required: select the desired rest(s) and pressV, or uncheck the "Visible" checkbox in theInspector. Rests in voices 2, 3 or 4 (butnot voice 1) can also be deleted (by selecting them and pressing Delete ) but it isnot recommended: make them invisible instead.

A voice 1 rest can only be deleted by removing that part of the measure from the score as well: see Remove selectedrange; or Delete measure(s).

Restoring deleted rests

If a rest has been deleted in voices 2-4, you will need to restore it before you can enter a note on that beat in that voice(the problem may arise, for example, in imported XML or MIDI files). The easiest way to fix such a measure is toexchange that voice with voice 1 twice. For the exact method, see Exchange voices of notes (below).

Exchange voices of notes

To swap the notes between any two voices:

1. Select one or more continuous measures (or a range of notes);

2. From the Menu bar, select Tools → Voices; 3. Select the option for the two voices you want to exchange.

Notes: (a) The selection can encompass content of any voice, but only two will be processed at once. (b) If you select apartial measure the operation will still apply to the whole measure.

Move notes to another voice (without swapping)

You can also move notes from one voice to another (without note-swapping):

1. Ensure you are not in note input mode.

2. Select one or more noteheads (in any voice). 3. Click on the destination voice in the Note Input toolbar or use the shortcut Ctrl+Alt+1–4 (Mac: Cmd+Option+1-4).

Note: For a successful move, the following conditions need to be met:

The chord in the destination voice must be the same duration as the note to be moved there. Alternatively, if the destination voice is occupied by a rest, it must be of sufficient duration to accommodate the moved note. Notes should not be tied.

See also

Keyboard shortcuts: Voices

Noteheads: Shared noteheads

External links

How to merge/combine/implode two staves in one with two voices

Video tutorial: How To Write Two Parts On One Staff: Voices

Copy and paste

MuseScore supports standard copy, cut, paste and swap with clipboard operations. These commands can be appliedto a range of:

Musical notes: e.g. to repeat a section of music, or shift a passage by a beat or a measure. Other score elements: such as articulations, staff text, dynamics, fingering etc.

Note: Lines cannot be copied but they can be duplicated (see below).

59Copy/cut/paste/swap commands are accessed in three ways:

From the Edit menu (above the document window).

From the menu displayed by right-clicking on an element or range of elements. Using one of the standard keyboard shortcuts.

Note: Before carrying out a copy, cut, paste or swap procedure, you should be innormal mode. Press the Esc key to exitinto normal mode.

Notes

You can cut, copy, paste or swap notes as follows:

Copy or cut

To copy/cut a single chord

1. Hold down Shift and click on a note in the chord.

2. Apply a Copy or Cut option (see table above).

To copy/cut a range of chords

1. Click on the first note or measure that you want to select.

2. Shift+Click on the last note or measure that you want to select. A blue rectangle highlights the region you selected. 3. Apply a Copy or Cut option (see table above).

Paste

1. Click on the note or measure where you want your pasted selection to begin. 2. Apply a Paste option (see table above).

Swap with Clipboard

The swap with clipboard operation combines two commands into one: (1) First it overwrites a selected part of the scorewith the contents of the clipboard, just like the paste command; (2) Secondly, it transfers the overwritten part of the scoreback to the clipboard, just like the copy command.

It can be used, for example, to swap two equal-length sections of a score,A and B:

1. Select section A, then apply the cut command;

2. Clear the selection (by pressing Esc or clicking on a blank area of the document window); 3. Press Shift and click on a note at the start of sectionB. Or, if B begins at the start of a measure, you can also simply select the measure; 4. Apply a Swap with clipboard option (see table above). 5. Section B is now in the clipboard. Paste it back to the blank area of score left by step "1."

Copy pitch of a single note only

It is possible to copy the pitch of a note only (and no other properties), by clicking on the notehead and applying thestandard copy and paste, or copy and swap procedure. The pitch of the destination note changes to match that of thecopied note but the duration remains the same.

Other elements

60Some elements such as staff text, dynamics, fingering, etc. can be cut, copied and pasted onlyone at a time. However,other elements support "multiple-selection" cut/copy/paste: such as articulations (sforzato, staccato etc.), fretboarddiagrams, and chord symbols.

Note: The Swap with clipboard command is only intended for use with sections of music and not other score elements.

Copy or cut

1. Select the element (or elements).

2. Apply a Copy or Cut option (see table above).

Paste

1. Click on the note where you want your pasted selection to begin. 2. Apply one of the Paste options (see table above).

In the case of articulations, they are pasted to the destination notes in exactly the same order (continuous or intermittent)as they were in the initial selection.

Quick repeat

To quickly copy and paste a note, measure, or passage:

1. Select a chord, measure, or passage as describedabove.

2. Press R .

MuseScore copies and pastes the selected notation to a point immediately after the last note in the selection. Any existingmusic in the destination range is replaced.

Duplicate

To instantaneously copy and paste a text element, line, or other object:

1. Hold down Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift), click on the element and drag it anywhere in the score. 2. Release the mouse button, and the selected element is cloned to the new location.

Paste half/double duration (version 3.1 and above)

This command allows you to half or double the note durations of a section of the score, then paste the altered section toanother part of the score.

Note: The Selection Filter works with the swap with clipboard command as well.

See also

If you want to change notes without altering the rhythm, you may combinere-pitch mode with copy and paste.

External links

Video tutorial: Lyrics, copying & dynamics

Selection modes

Objects in the score—such as notes, measures, articulations etc.—can be selected in several ways: (1)one at a time, (2)as a continuous range, or (3) as a list.

Select a single object

Most score objects can be selected by simply clicking on them inNormal mode.

Select a single note

In Normal mode, click on a notehead.

Note: Selecting a single note then copying and pasting it, will only copy and paste the pitch—not duration or otherproperties (such as stemless). To copy the entire note, including all properties, you need to hold down Shift—as for chordselection (below).

Select a chord

In Normal mode, press and hold Shift, then click on a notehead in the chord.

Select a single measure

Click on a blank space within the measure.

Select a continuous range of objects

There are several ways to select a continuous range of notes, chords or measures:

1. Shift selection

1. Make sure you are in Normal mode;

2. Select the first note, chord, rest or measure in the range. You can extend the selection up or down to adjacent

62 staves, if needed, using Shift+↑ or ↓ ; 3. Then choose one of the following options: To advance the selection one chord at a time to the right: PressShift+→. To advance the selection one chord at a time to the left: Press Shift+←. To advance the selection one measure at a time to the right: PressShift+Ctrl+→ (Mac: Shift+Cmd+→). To advance the selection one measure at a time to the left: PressShift+Ctrl+← (Mac: Shift+Cmd+←). To advance the selection to the beginning of the line: PressShift+Home (Mac: Shift+Fn+←). To advance the selection to the end of the line: PressShift+End (Mac: Shift+Fn+→). To extend the selection to the beginning of the score: PressShift+Ctrl+Home (Mac: Shift+Cmd+Fn+←). To extend the selection to the end of the score: PressShift+Ctrl+End (Mac: Shift+Cmd+Fn+→).

2. Shift + click selection

To select a range of notes or rests:

1. Make sure you are in Normal mode;

2. Click on the first note or rest in the range; 3. Press and hold Shift, then click on the last desired note or rest.

Note: The final selected element can be in the same staff or in staffs above or below the initial note/rest. All selectedelements will be enclosed in a blue rectangle, including associated lines and articulations (but not voltas). You can repeatthe operation to extend the selected range as required.

Select a range of measures

1. Click on a blank space in the first desired measure;

2. Hold down Shift, then click on a space in the last measure of the desired range.

Note: As with selecting notes, the range can be extended vertically as well as horizontally.

3. Drag selection

This method can be used to select notes or rests, or, independently, to select non-note symbols such as staccato dots,lyrics etc.:

Press and hold Shift, then drag the cursor across the desired range.

4. Select All

This method selects the whole musical score including notes, rests and associated elements. Use one of the followingoptions:

Press Ctrl+A (Mac: Cmd+A).

From the menu bar, select Edit → Select All.

5. Select section

This method is used to select a section—a region of the score starting and/or ending with asection break:

1. Click on an empty space in a measure in the section;

2. From the menu bar, select Edit → Select Section.

Note: See Copy and paste: Selection filter to disable certain types of elements from being selected in a range selection.

Select a list of objects

To select a list (or discontinuous range) of score elements:

1. Click on the first element;

Note: This method cannot be used to select measures. Usesingle or range selection instead.

Select all similar

63To select all elements of a specific type (e.g., all barlines, all text elements, all staccato markings):

1. Select an element; 2. Right click and chose Select…; 3. Several options are available: All Similar Elements: Selects all elements in the score similar to the chosen object. All Similar Elements in Same Staff: Selects all elements in the same staff similar to the chosen object. All Similar Elements in Range Selection: only applies if a range has been selected. Selects all elements in the range similar to the chosen object. More...: opens a dialog that lets you fine-tune more options. For example, if you have a notehead selected, the dialog will look something like this:

Select Same notehead: In this example, only noteheads of the samegroup will be selected; Same pitch: Only noteheads of the same pitch will be selected; Same string: (tablature only) selects fretmarks on same string. Same type: All noteheads (of any group) will be selected; Same duration: Only noteheads of same duration will be selected; Same note name: Noteheads of that name in all octaves will be selected; Same staff: Only noteheads on the same staff will be selected. Same voice: Selects all notes of same voice. In selection: Same system: Action Replace selection: The default option—starts the selection from scratch; Add to selection: Keeps everything you have already selected, and adds the current selection to it; Search in selection: Subtract from selection: Keep everything you have already selected, but takes away the current selection.

Basics chapter, esp. Note input

Undo and redo

MuseScore remembers an unlimited number of undo/redo actions.

64The standard shortcuts are:

Undo Ctrl+Z (Mac: ⌘+Z)

Redo Ctrl+Shift+Z or Ctrl+Y (Mac: ⌘+Shift+Z)

Or use the toolbar buttons:

Viewing and navigation

This chapter describes the options available in the View Menu, and in the Zoom and Page View/Continuous Viewmenus (located in the toolbar above the score). It also details the various navigation commands and functions.

There are several ways to zoom the score in or out:

Zoom In: Ctrl++ (Mac: Cmd ++)

Zoom In: View→Zoom In

Zoom Out: View→Zoom Out.

Mouse

Zoom In: Scroll up with the mouse wheel while holding downCtrl (Mac: Cmd) Zoom Out: Scroll down with the mouse wheel while holding downCtrl (Mac: Cmd).

Drop-down menu: To set a specific zoom, use the dropdown menu in the standard toolbar to set the view magnification of the score (25–1600 %) or display it using the options "Page Width", "Whole Page", or "Two Pages".

To return to 100% zoom: Use the shortcut Ctrl+0 (Mac: Cmd+0).

Toolbars

65The Toolbar area is located between the Menu bar and the document window.

To show or hide certain toolbars:

Select View→Toolbars , and tick/untick the options as required.

Alternatively, right-click on an empty space in the toolbar area, or the title bar of the Inspector, and, from the menu, check or uncheck the required options.

Note: This option also allows you to show or hide the Timeline, Score Comparison Tool, Script Recorder, Piano Keyboard,Selection Filter, and Drumset Tools.

Customize toolbar area

Select View→Toolbars , and click on "Customize Toolbars…"

The dialog shows the toolbars that can be customized on the left, the current tool buttons for the selected toolbar in themiddle, and the buttons that can be added on the right. When you have selected a toolbar in the left panel, you can do anyof the following actions:

Remove a toolbutton: Select the button in the middle panel, and press→. Add a toolbutton: Select the button in the right panel, and press←. Move a toolbutton: Select the button in the middle panel, and move it up or down using↑ or ↓ .

Select this option to create a custom workspace or to edit an existing workspace.

Show Status bar

66The Status bar, at the bottom of the screen, gives information about selected score elements. Tick/untick this option todisplay or hide.

Split display

It is possible to split the document display so as to view two documents at once, or to view two different parts of the samedocument. Tabs allow you to choose which document to display in each view. You can drag the barrier separating the twoscores to adjust the amount of space in the window devoted to each:

Documents Side by Side: Divides the window vertically into two score views. Documents Stacked: Divides the window horizontally into two score views, one above the other.

Visibility options

This section allows you to display or hide various non-printing elements:

Show Invisible: View/hide elements that have been made invisible for printing and export. If this option is ticked, invisible elements are shown in the score window as light gray. Show Unprintable: View/hide breaks and spacer symbols. Show Frames: View/hide the dotted outlines offrames. Show Page Margins: View/hide Page Margins.

Mark irregular measures

A blue dash at the top right of a measure indicates that its duration differs from that set by the time signature.

Full screen

Full Screen mode expands MuseScore to fill your screen so more content is visible.

Page/Continuous View

You can switch between different views of the score using the drop-down list in thetoolbar area:

To scroll the score:

Vertically: Move the mouse wheel up or down.

Horizontally: Press Shift and move the mouse wheel up or down.

Page View

In Page View, the score is formatted as it will appear when printed or exported as a PDF or image file: that is, page bypage, with margins. MuseScore applies system (line) and page breaks automatically, according to the settings made inPage settings and Style…. In addition, you can apply your own system (line), page or section breaks.

To choose between horizontal or vertical page scrolling, see Preferences: Canvas (Scroll pages).

Continuous View

67In Continuous View, the score is shown as one unbroken system. Even if the starting point is not in view, measurenumbers, instrument names, clefs, time and key signatures will always be displayed on the left of the window.

Note: Because the layout is simpler, MuseScore may perform faster in Continuous View than Page View.

Single Page View

In Single Page View the score is shown as a single page with a header but no margins, and with an infinite page height.System (line) breaks are added automatically, according to the settings made inPage settings and Style: General. Inaddition, you can apply your own system (line) or section breaks.

Side panels

The workspaces, Inspector and Selection filter are conveniently displayed as side panels to the left and right of thescore window. To undock a side panel use one of the following methods:

Drag the panel;

Click on the double chevron at the top of the panel; Double click in the title area at the top of the panel.

To dock a panel use one of the following procedures:

Drag the panel to the top/bottom of an existing side panel and it will stack vertically above/below that panel. Drag the panel to the middle of an existing side panel and it will overlay that panel. Both panels can then be accessed by tabs.

Alternatively, double-clicking the title bar of the panel will restore it to its previously docked position.

Navigation

Commands

Various commands are available to help you navigate more easily through the score. These are listed underKeyboardshortcuts: Navigation.

Navigator

The Navigator is an optional panel which displays page thumbnails of the score at the bottom or to the right of thedocument window.

To view or hide the Navigator, select View→Navigator; or use a customized shortcut.

The Navigator appears at the bottom of the document window if scrolling pages horizontally; or on the right if scrollingpages vertically (see Preferences: Canvas).

The blue box represents the area of the score that is currently visible in the document window: drag the box, or clickdirectly on the navigator panel to bring another part of the score into view. You can also drag the scrollbar.

Timeline

The Timeline panel provides a detailed overview of the score, with expanded possibilities for navigation and interaction.

To display the Timeline, press F12; or select View→Timeline.

For details, see Timeline.

68Find

The Find function allows you to speedily navigate to a specific measure,rehearsal mark or page number in the score:

1. Press Ctrl+F (Mac: Cmd+F), or select Edit→Find. This opens the Find (or Go to) bar at the bottom of the workspace.

2. Use one of the following options:

To go to a numbered measure: enter the measure number (counting every measure, starting with 1, irrespective of pickup measures, section breaks or manual changes to measure number offsets). To go to a numbered page: enter the page number using the format pXX (where XX is the page number). To go to a numerical rehearsal mark: enter the number using the format rXX (where XX is the name of the rehearsal mark. To go to a rehearsal mark starting with a letter: enter the name of therehearsal mark (the search is case insensitive).

N.B.: It is best to avoid naming rehearsal marks with the single letters "R," "r," "P", "p," or one of these letters with an integer (e.g. "R1" or "p3"), as this can confuse the search algorithm.

See also

Save/Export/Print File format Layout and formatting

Concert pitch

You can chose to display the score in eitherwritten or concert (sounding) pitch. Written pitch displays the score as itshould look when printed for musicians to read. However, during preparation you may prefer the convenience of seeingthe transposing instruments notated as they sound, without transposition. In this case you should select the "Concertpitch" option.

To toggle the score display between written or concert pitch:

Press the Concert Pitch button (located in the top right of thetoolbar area). When this button is highlighted the score is in concert pitch.

Before printing the score, exporting it to PDF or saving it online, you should ensure that theConcert Pitch button is off, andthat the individual parts are correctly transposed.

Open recent… allows you to choose from a list of recently-opened scores.

Save...: Save current score to file.

Save As...: Save current score to new file. Save a Copy...: Save current score to new file, but continue to edit original file. Save Selection...: Save selected measures to new file. Save Online...: To save and share your scores on the web at MuseScore.com . For details, see Share scores online.

Export

Export... and Export Parts... allow you to create non-MuseScore files, such as PDF, MusicXML, MIDI, andvarious audioand image formats. In the Export dialog, you can choose which format to export to.

Export...: Export current score to format of your choice.

Export Parts...: Export current score and all linked parts to separate files in a format of your choice.

MuseScore remembers which format you picked the last time and makes that the default for the next time.

Print

Print... allows to print your MuseScore file directly to a printer from MuseScore. Depending on your printer you will havedifferent options, but generally you can define the page range, number of copies and collation.

If you have a PDF printer installed, you could also "export" to PDF usingPrint, but it's usually better to use the native PDFoption under Export for more accurate rendition. Note: For this to work properly with Adobe PDF, make sure to uncheck"Rely on system fonts only, do not use document fonts" in Printer properties.

See also

File format Part extraction

Share scores online

Go to musescore.com/sheetmusic to view other scores from MuseScore.

You can save and share your scores online at MuseScore.com . You can choose to save a score privately for personalaccess from any computer, or share it publicly. MuseScore.com enables the viewing and playback of scores in your webbrowser - an additional feature entitled VideoScores allows synchronization between the score and a YouTube video. Foruse outside of a web browser, you can download the score in a variety of formats (including PDF, MIDI, MP3, MusicXML,and the original MuseScore file).

Create an account

1. Visit MuseScore.com and click on "Create new account ". Pick a username and enter a valid email and press "Create New Account". 2. Wait a few minutes for an email from MuseScore.com support. If no email arrives, check your spam folder. 3. Click the link in the email and visit your user profile to change your password.

Share a score directly from MuseScore

To save a score online:

1. Make sure that the Concert Pitch button is off, and that the individual parts are correctly transposed.

2. From the menu, select File→Save Online.... The "Log in to MuseScore" dialog will appear: 702. From the menu, select File→Save Online.... The "Log in to MuseScore" dialog will appear:

3. Enter your email address or MuseScore username, and password, then clickOK. Note: If you don't have a MuseScore account yet, create one first by clicking on the "Create an account" link. That will open your browser app and bring you to musescore.com/user/register .

4. Upon successfully logging in, you'll be able to enter your score information.

Title: The title of the score.

71 Description: The descriptive text that will appear next to it. Make the score private: If ticked, the score can only be viewed via a private link. If unticked, the score is visible to all. License: Chose an appropriate copyright license from the drop-down list.Note: Creative Commons license , allows people to use your scores under certain restrictions. Tags: You can add tags to help identify scores on MuseScore.com. Use commas to separate multiple tags.

5. If the score already exists online, it will be updated automatically—you can add additional information in the changelog section of the dialog if required. This can retrieved on MuseScore.com under "Revision history" for that score. Uncheck Update the existing score to save online as a new score.

6. If you are using a different SoundFont than the default one and if you are able to exportMP3 files (may not be the case on some Linux versions), a checkbox Upload score audio will be visible:

If the checkbox is checked, MuseScore will render the audio of the score using the current synthesizer settings and upload the audio to MuseScore.com.

Upload a score on MuseScore.com

You can also upload a score directly on MuseScore.com.

1. Click the Upload link on MuseScore.com.

2. You have the same options as with the Save Online menu. 3. You have also access to more information, such asGenre.

Note: Should you reach the five score upload limit, you can still upload scores directly from MuseScore, but only the lastfive are visible. If you wish more than this amount, upgrade to a Pro Account first.

Edit a score on MuseScore.com

If you want to make changes to one of your scores on MuseScore.com, edit the MuseScore file on your own computer,save it, and then do the following:

If you originally shared the score directly from within MuseScore, simply go to File→Save Online... again to update the online score. If you originally uploaded the score via the Upload page on MuseScore.com, then you must follow these steps to update the online score: 1. Go to the score page on MuseScore.com. 2. Click the three dots menu ⋮ on the right and choose "Update this score". 3. In the form, you can upload a replacement score file as well as change the accompanying information and privacy settings.

Switch to the direct method of updating an online score

It is much more convenient to update online scores from directly within MuseScore than by updating the score manuallyfrom the score page. Follow these steps if you originally uploaded the score via the Upload page and now want toswitch to the direct method:

1. Go to the score page on MuseScore.com and copy the URL.

2. Open the score file on your computer with MuseScore. 3. From the menu, select File→Score Properties... and paste the URL into the "Source" field.

Now whenever you want to update the online score simply go toFile→Save Online....

External links

How to delete a score saved on MuseScore.com

72NotationIn the previous →"Basics" chapter you learned how to enter notes and interact with the palettes. The "Notation" chapterdescribes the different types of notation in more detail, including more advanced music notation.

See also →"Advanced topics".

Barlines

Barline symbols are available in the Barlines palette:

Change barline type

To change an existing barline, use one of the following:

Select a barline, or measure, then double click an icon in the Barlines palette. Drag an icon from the Barlines palette onto a barline, or a measure, in the score. Select an existing barline, then adjust "Style" in the "Barline" section of theInspector.

To change a non-single to a single barline:

Select the barline and press Del.

To hide a barline:

Select the line and press V, or uncheck Visible in the Inspector.

Insert barline

To insert a new barline between existing ones, either:

Drag an icon from the Barlines palette onto a note or rest.

Select a note or rest, then double-click an icon in the Barlines palette.

Split a measure

You can insert a barline in order split a measure. Use one of the following methods:

Press Ctrl (Mac Cmd) and drag the line to the first note of the new measure. Select the first note of the new measure and press Ctrl (Mac Cmd) while you double click a barline.

Note: As of version 3.1 (or earlier), all barlines entered this way are entered as Normal Barlines.See also Split ameasure.

Custom barlines

It is possible to create custom barlines by selecting one or more barlines, and adjusting the properties in the "Barlines"section of the Inspector:

Style: Chose from a range of preset barlines.

Span to next staff: joins the selected barline to the barline in the staff below. Span from: Sets the position of the top of the barline. "0" is the top staff line. Positive numbers start lower down the staff, negative numbers above. Span to: Sets the position of the bottom of the barline (see "Span from"). Span presets: Use the buttons to apply preset customized barlines.

73See also Mensurstrich.

Changes to color and horizontal/vertical offset can also be made in the Inspector.

Connect barlines

Barlines may extend over multiple staves, as in the grand staff of a piano, or in an orchestral score to join instruments inthe same section. To join barlines:

1. Double-click on a barline to enter Edit mode.

2. Click on the lower blue handle and drag it down to the staff you wish to connect to. The handle snaps into position so there is no need to position it exactly.

3. Press Esc to exit edit mode. This will update all other relevant barlines as well.

Select a clef and press Del.

Display clef only in the first measure (for all staves)

1. From the menu, select Format→Style...→ Page;

2. Uncheck "Create clef for all systems."

Display clef only in the first measure (for a particular staff)

1. Right click on the staff, select Staff properties... and uncheck "Show clef;" 2. Open the master palette and select the "Symbols" section; 3. Drag and drop a clef from the master palette onto the first measure of the staff; OR select the first note and double- click a clef in the master palette.

Note: This option may be useful to TAB users who do not want the clef to repeat on every subsequent line.

Hide all clefs in a particular staff

1. Right click on the staff, and select Staff properties... ;

2. Uncheck "Show clef."

Key signatures

75Standard key signatures are available in the Key Signatures palette in the Basic or Advanced workspaces. It is alsopossible to create custom key signatures (below).

Add a new key signature

Add new key signature to all staves

Use any of the following methods:

Drag a key signature from the palette onto an empty part of a measure. Select a measure and double-click a key signature in the palette. Select a note and double-click a key signature in a palette.

Add new key signature to one staff only

If you wish to change the key signature of onlyone staff line, leaving others unchanged:

Press Ctrl (Mac: ⌘) and hold while you drag a key signature from a palette onto a measure.

Replace an existing key signature

Replace key signature for all staves

Use any of the following methods:

Drag a key signature from the palette onto the key signature to be replaced (or onto the measure containing the key signature). Select the key signature to be replaced, and double-click a new key signature in a palette.

Replace key signature for one staff only

If you wish to replace the key signature of only one staff, leaving others unchanged:

Press Ctrl (Mac: ⌘) and hold while you drag a key signature from a palette onto the key signature to be replaced (or onto the measure containing the key signature).

Remove a key signature

Use any of the following methods:

Click on an existing key signature and press Del.

Drag the empty key signature from the palette (in the advanced workspace) onto the measure.

Naturals on key signature changes

By default, MuseScore only shows cancelling naturals when the key signature changes to that of C Major/A minor (nosharps or flats). In all other cases, it simply shows the new key signature without cancellations:

76However, you can opt to display cancelling naturals for all key signature changes:

To turn off the display of all courtesy key signatures:

Note: Courtesy key signatures are not displayed at section breaks.

Custom key signatures

To create a custom key signature:

1. Press Shift+K to display the Key signatures section of the Master palette.

77 2. In the Create Key signature panel, drag accidentals from the palette onto the "staff" above to create the desired key signature. Use the Clear button, if required, to remove all accidentals from the "staff."

3. Press Add to move the new key signature into the library (center panel).

Note: Playback of custom key signatures is not currently supported.

To move a key signature from the Master palette to acustom palette :

Drag and drop the key signature onto a palette.

To apply a key signatures to the score directly from the Master palette, use one of the following methods:

Select a measure and double-click a key signature in the Master palette.

Drag a key signature from the Master palette onto a measure.

Time signatures

Time signatures can be found in a Palette of the same name in both the Basic and Advancedworkspaces.

Add or replace a time signature

Use any of the following methods:

Select a time signature, measure, note or rest, and double-click a time signature in a palette. Drag and drop a time signature from a palette onto a space in a measure, or onto an existing time signature.

Delete a time signature

To delete a time signature in the score, select it and press Del.

Create a time signature

If the time signature you require is not available in any of the existingpalettes, it can be created as follows:

1. Press Shift+T to display the Time signatures section of the Master Palette. 2. Select a time signature to edit in the center panel.

78 3. In the Create Time Signature panel, edit the various parameters (numerator, denominator, text, beaming) to get the time signature and properties you want. To restore the default beaming pattern, press Reset. 4. Press Add to add the newly-created time signature to the center panel. To delete a time signature from the center panel, right-click on it and select Clear. 5. Drag and drop the time signature from the Master Palette to the desired score location.

This can be saved to a custom palette for future use, if desired.

Time signature properties

To display the Time Signature Properties dialog:

Right-click on a time signature and select Time Signature Properties… .

Global value: Shows the global time signature and is set automatically when youadd a time signature to the score. It is the reference for beats (as shown in the status bar) and tempo markings. Actual value: Shows the time signature associated with a particular staff. This is normally the same as the global time signature, but can be set independently if required. See Local time signatures. Appearance: Allows you to edit the displayed text without affecting the underlying time signature. For an example, see Additive meters. Note Groups: Allows you to change the default beaming of notes associated with a time signature. SeeChange default beaming.

Change default beaming

To adjust note-beaming for a particular time signature:

1. Right-click on the time signature and select, Time Signature Properties… ;

2. To break a note beam in the Note Groups panel, click on the note following it. To reset the beam, click in the same place. Alternatively, you can change beaming by dragging a beam icon onto a note, as follows:

Start beam at this note.

Do not end beam at this note.

1/8th note beam to left of this note.

1/16 note beam to left of this note.

Checking the box for "Also change shorter notes," means that any beam changes at one level are applied automatically toshorter durations as well. The Reset button cancels any changes made in that session.

79Additive (composite) meters

Additive (or composite) time signatures are sometimes used to clarify the division of beats within a measure. To create anadditive time signature:

1. Right-click on a time signature in the score and select Time Signature properties… ; 2. In the Appearance section, adjust the "Text" property as required; 3. Adjust note beaming in the Note Groups section if required.

Note: The Time Signatures section of the Master palette also allows you to create additive time signatures (see above).

Local time signatures

In certain cases a score may show staves with different time signatures running at the same time. For example, in Bach's26. Goldberg Variation:

In the above example, the global time signature is 3/4, but the time signature of the upper staff has been setindependently to 18/16.

To set a local time signature for just one staff:

Hold down Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) and drag and drop a time signature from a palette onto an empty measure.

Resize time signature

Select one or more time signatures and, in the "Time Signature" section of theInspector, adjust the "Scale X" (width) and "Scale Y" (height) values.

Pickup measures and cadenzas

Occasionally you will need to decrease or increase the duration of a measure without changing the time signature—forexample, in a pickup measure (anacrusis) or in a cadenza etc. See Measure operations: Measure duration.

Time signature changes and breaks

Multi-measure rests are interrupted when a time signature change occurs. Also, asection break will prevent a courtesytime signature being shown at the end of the previous measure.

See also

Key signature

External links

How To Using Polyrhythm, mixed meters and local time signatures in MuseScore Additive meters at Wikipedia.

Accidentals

The most common types of accidentals are provided in the Accidentals toolbar above the score and in the Accidentalspalette in the basic workspace

80A more comprehensive range can be found in the Accidentals palette in the advanced workspace.

Add accidental

Accidentals are automatically added to a note, as appropriate, when you increase or decrease its pitch:

↑: Increase the pitch of a note by one semitone (favors sharps).

↓: Decrease the pitch of a note by one semitone (favors flats).

To add either (i) a double flat or double sharp, (ii) a courtesy (also known ascautionary or reminder) accidental, or (iii) anon-standard accidental, use one of the following options:

Select a note and click on an accidental in the toolbar above the score. Select a note and double-click an accidental in the Accidentals palette (basic or advanced workspace). Drag an accidental from the Accidentals palette on to a note.

If you wish to add brackets to a cautionary accidental, use one of the following:

Select the accidental in the score and double-click the parentheses symbol in the Accidentals palette. Drag the parentheses symbol from the palette onto the accidental. Select the accidental and chose from the Bracket type dropdown in the Inspector.

If required, accidentals can be deleted by clicking on them and pressingDel.

Change enharmonic spelling

To change the enharmonic spelling of a note, or notes, in both writtenand concert pitch views:

1. Select a note, or group of notes;

To change the enharmonic spelling in the written pitch view, without affecting the concert pitch view, or vice versa:

1. Select a note, or group of notes;

2. Press Ctrl+J (Mac: Cmd+J ); 3. Continue pressing the same combination of keys to cycle through the enharmonic equivalents.

Note: If the pitches of selected notes are not all the same, the effect may be unpredictable.

Respell pitches

From the menu, select Tools→Respell Pitches .

See also

Key signature: Change

External links

Accidental at Wikipedia Enharmonic at Wikipedia

Arpeggios and glissandi

Arpeggio and Glissando symbols can be found in the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette in the advanced workspace. Thispalette also includes strum arrows, an arpeggio bracket, wind instrument articulations, and slide in/slide out symbols.

81Add symbol

To add an arpeggio, glissando etc. to the score, use one of the following methods:

Select one or more notes, then double-click a symbol in a palette.

Drag a symbol from a palette onto a note.

Adjust dimensions

To adjust the length and height of a symbol:

Enter Edit mode for the symbol, and adjust the handles using keyboard shortcuts.

Custom symbols

After selecting a symbol, various useful properties can be adjusted in the "Glissando" or "Arpeggio" section of theInspector.

Glissando

Type: Choose between a straight or wavy line;

Show text: Tick this box if you want the symbol to display text. Then set the wording, font-face, font-size and font- style underneath. Note: If there isn't enough room between notes, the text is not displayed; Play: Check/uncheck the box to turn playback on or off. Play style: Chose how the glissando plays back. There are four options: Chromatic, White keys, Black keys, Diatonic;

Arpeggio

Stretch: Increase this to lengthen the duration of the arpeggio.

Play: Untick if you don't want the symbol to affect playback.

If needed for future use, you can save the result in acustom palette.

Arpeggios

When an arpeggio or strum arrow is added to the score, it initially spans only onevoice. To change the height, see Adjustdimensions (above). Playback of the symbol can be turned on or off in theInspector.

Glissandi (slides)

A Glissando or, more informally, a slide, spans two consecutive notes. It may be wavy or straight, with or without text.E.g.

82Adjust start and end points of a glissando

To move an end handle vertically or horizontally, from one note to the next:

1. Double-click the symbol to enter edit mode;

2. Click on the start or end handle: Use Shift+↑↓ to move the handle up or down, from note to note. Use Shift+←→ moves the handle horizontally, from note to note.

Use this command to create cross-staff glissandi. Or to correct the positions of end handles when applying multipleglissandi to chords.

Wind instrument articulations

Fall, Doit, Plop and Scoop symbols are provided. To change the length and curvature, select the symbol, entereditmode and adjust the handles as described in Edit mode: Lines.

Slide in/out

Slide in and Slide out lines can also be found in the "Arpeggios & Glissandi" palette. To edit the length and angle of aline, double-click on it and drag the handle (or use the Inspector or keyboard arrows for finer adjustment).

External links

Arpeggio at Wikipedia Glissando at Wikipedia

Articulations and ornaments

A comprehensive set of symbols can be found in theArticulations palette in the Advanced workspace:

and the Ornaments palette (Advanced workspace):

There is also an abbreviated version of Articulations in the Basic workspace.

Articulations

83Articulations are the symbols added to the score to show how a note or chord is to be played. The principal symbols inthis group are:

Specialist articulations are also included for bowed and plucked strings, wind instruments etc.

Ornaments

Ornaments include:

Mordents, Inverted Mordents, Pralltrills

Trills Turns Bends

Note: Appoggiaturas and acciaccaturas can be found in the Grace Notes palette.

Add articulation/ornament

Use either of the following methods:

Select a note or a range of notes, then double-click a symbol in a palette.

Drag a symbol from a palette onto a notehead.

Add accidental to an ornament

To apply an accidental to an existing ornament, such as a trill:

1. Select the note to which the ornament is attached;

2. Open the Symbols section of the Master palette; 3. Search for and apply the desired accidental to the score (small accidentals can be found using the search term "figured bass"); 4. Drag the accidental into position (or reposition using keyboard shortcuts or the Inspector).

Add fermata to a barline

A fermata can be applied directly to a barline by selecting the barline and double-clicking the fermata from a palette. Thisdoes not affect playback though.

Toggle Staccato: Shift+S

Keyboard shortcuts can be customized in MuseScore's Preferences.

Immediately after adding an articulation or ornament from a palette, the symbol is automatically selected: It can then bemoved up or down from the keyboard as follows:

Press up/down arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time);

Press Ctrl+↑ or Ctrl+↓ (Mac: Cmd+↑ or Cmd+↓ ) for larger vertical adjustments (1 sp at a time). To flip a symbol to the other side of the note (where applicable), select it and pressX.

84To enable adjustments in all directions from the keyboard:

1. Double click on the symbol to enter Edit mode, or click on it and press Ctrl+E (Mac: Cmd+E) , or right-click on the symbol and select "Edit element"; 2. Press arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time); or pressCtrl+Arrow (Mac: Cmd+Arrow) for larger adjustments (1 sp at a time).

You can also change the horizontal and vertical offset values in theInspector. To position more than one symbol at atime, select the desired symbols and adjust the offset values in the Inspector.

Note: The symbol can also be repositioned by clicking and dragging, but for more precise control, use the methods above.

Articulation and ornament properties

These can be edited from the Articulation section of the Inspector and may include:

Placement: Above or below the staff.

Direction: Auto / Up / Down. Anchor: Adjust the vertical placement of the symbol. Time stretch: For fermatas, adjust the pause length. Ornament style: Default or Baroque. Play: Turn playback on or off.

For Bend properties, see Bends.

Global settings for articulations and ornaments can be found in Format… → Style… → Layout and formatting .

See also

Grace notes

External links

Ornaments at Wikipedia

Bends

A variety of simple and complex (multi-stage) bends can be created with theBend Tool , located in the Articulationspalette of the Advanced workspace.

Apply a bend

To apply one or more bends to the score, use one of the following options:

Select one or more notes and double-click a bend symbol in the palette. Drag a bend symbol from the palette on to a note.

Edit text and line properties

Various font properties, and line thickness, can be edited in the Bend section of the Inspector. Text and line Propertiesapplying to all bends in the score can be edited in Format→Style...→Bend

Edit bend properties

Select a bend symbol in the score and press "Properties" in theBend section of the Inspector.

85Preset options are available, if needed, on the left hand side of theBend properties window. The current bend isrepresented by a graph consisting of gray lines connected by square, blue nodes (see image above). The slope of theline indicates the type of bend:

Up-slope = Up-bend Down-slope = Down-bend Horizontal line = Hold

The vertical axis of the graph represents the amount by which the pitch is bent up or down: one unit equals a quarter-tone: 2 units a semitone, 4 units a whole-tone, and so on. The horizontal axis of the graph indicates the length of thebend: each gray line segment extends for 1 space (sp) in the score.

A bend is modified by adding or deleting nodes in the graph:

To add a node, click on an empty intersection.

To delete a node, click on it.

Adding a node lengthens the bend by 1 sp; deleting a node shortens the bend by 1 sp. The Start and End points of thebend can be moved up and down only.

Adjust height

The height of the bend symbol is automatically adjusted so that it appears just above the staff. This height can bereduced, if necessary, with a workaround:

1. Create another note on the top line (or space) of the staff, vertically above the note at which you want the bend to start. 2. Apply the bend to the higher note first: this will give you a bend symbol with the lowest height. 3. To increase the height of the bend move this note downward. 4. Drag the bend symbol downwards to the correct position. 5. Mark the top note invisible and silent (using the Inspector).

Adjust position

To adjust position use one of the following:

Drag the bend symbol with a mouse.

Click on the symbol and adjust the horizontal and vertical offsets in theInspector. Double click on the symbol; or click on it and pressCtrl+E (Mac: Cmd+E); or right-click on the symbol and select "Edit element." Then use the arrow keys for fine positioning (0.1 sp at a time); or Ctrl+Arrow (Mac: Cmd+Arrow) for larger adjustments (1 sp at a time).

Custom bends

After a bend has been created in the score it can be saved for future use by dragging and dropping the symbol to a palettewhile holding down Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift). See Custom Workspace.

Beams

Multiple notes of less than a quarter note (crotchet) are usually connected with beams. The overall beam pattern isestablished automatically according to the time signature.

86Adjust automatic note beaming for a time signature

Right-click on the time signature and select Time Signature Properties. Then edit "Note Groups" (see Change default beaming).

Change the beaming of individual notes

You can overrule the default beaming of any note usingbeam symbols in the Beam Properties palette of the "Basic" or"Advanced" workspaces:

To change one or more note beams (except feathered beams, below), use one of the following methods:

Drag and drop a beam symbol from the Beam Properties palette onto a note in the score. Select one or more notes in the score and double click the desired symbol in theBeam Properties palette.

To apply feathered note beams, use either of the following methods:

Drag and drop a feathered-beam symbol from the Beam Properties palette onto a note beam in the score. Select one or more note beams in the score, then double click on a feathered-beam symbol in theBeam Properties palette.

Notes: (1) Feathered beams may use 2 or 3 lines depending on the tempo and the desired rate of the change; (2) Tocreate a 2-line feathered beam, you need to start with a continuous run of beamed sixteenth notes; (3) To create a 3-linefeathered beam, you need to start with continuous run of beamed thirty-second notes; (4) Playback of feathered beams isnot supported.

Beam symbols and their effects

Icon Name Description

Beam start If the note is beamed to a previous note, break the beam.

Create a beam from the selected note to the previous note (if applicable). This applies to Beam Beam middle 16th sub and Beam 32nd sub as well.

No beam Break beams before and after the selected note.

Beam 16th sub Start a second level beam at this note.

Beam 32nd sub Start a third level beam at this note.

Automatic Beam Apply default beaming as determined by the current time signature (see above).

Note: Be aware that the beam between two notes/rests is determined by both of the note/rests. For example: Twoconsecutive notes with a status of start beam here will not have a beam between them. If the two consecutive notes arewilling to connect to each other they will beam, if one of them is not willing, the two notes will not beam.

Adjust beam angle

To adjust with the keyboard or mouse:

1. Enter edit mode on the note beam—the right adjustment handle is automatically selected. 2. Use the up/down arrows or drag the right end handle to change the angle of the beam;

87 3. Press Esc to exit edit mode.

To adjust with the Inspector:

1. Click on a note beam.

2. Tick the "User position" box in the "Beam" section of theInspector; 3. Set the "Position" values to get the desired beam angle.

Adjust beam height

To adjust with the keyboard or mouse:

1. Enter edit mode on the note beam—the right adjustment handle is automatically selected. 2. Press Shift+Tab or click the left handle to select it; 3. Use the up/down arrows or drag the left end handle to change the height of the beam; 4. Press Esc to exit edit mode.

To adjust with the Inspector:

1. Click on a note beam.

2. Tick the "User position" box in the "Beam" section of theInspector; 3. Set the "Position" values as desired.

Make beam horizontal

1. Select a note beam

2. Tick the "Force Horizontal" box in the "Beam" section of the Inspector; 3. If desired, adjust the beam height with the keyboard/mouse:

If you want all note beams in the score to be horizontal there is a "Flatten all beams" option inFormat→Style…→Beams.

Adjust feathered beams

To adjust feathered beams:

1. Select a note beam.

2. Adjust the values in the "Grow left" and "Grow right" boxes in the "Beam" section of theInspector.

Local relayout

MuseScore spaces notes according to their time values, allowing for accidentals, lyrics etc. In systems where there ismore than one staff, this may result in irregular note spacing, as in the following example:

Local relayout is a tickbox option in the Inspector allowing you to specify those passages in the score where you wantthe note spacing to be independent of other staves in the system. Applying "Local relayout" to the note beams in the topstaff of the previous example results in a more even distribution of notes:

To do a local relayout:

88 1. Select one or more note beams. 2. Tick the option Local relayout in the "Beam" section of theInspector.

Flip note beam

To flip a beam from above to below the notes, or vice-versa:

1. Select one or more note beams.

2. Use any of the following options: Press the X key;

Press the "Flip direction" icon, , in the toolbar.

Select a "Direction" option (Auto, Up or Down) in the "Beam" section of theInspector.

Reset Beam Mode

To restore beams to the mode defined in the local time signatures:

1. Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; 2. Select Format→Reset Beams.

See also

Cross-staff notation Edit mode Note input

External links

How beams work

How to add a beam over a rest How to place a beam between notes

Brackets

MuseScore provides brackets and a curly brace in the Brackets palette (Advanced workspace).

Add

To add a bracket or brace to systems, use one of two methods:

Drag a bracket/brace icon from a palette on to the staff where you want the bracket/brace to start. Select a measure on the staff where you want the bracket/brace to start, and double-click the desired icon in a palette.

Delete

Select the bracket and press Del.

Change

Drag the desired icon from a palette onto an existing bracket/brace in the score.

Edit

When you first apply a bracket it only spans one staff. To extend to other staves:

1. Enter Edit mode.

2. Drag the handle downwards to span the required staves. The handle snaps into position, so exact placement is not required.

89Style

The default thickness and distance from the system of brackets and braces can be adjusted inFormat→ Style... →System.

Breaths and pauses

Breath and pause markings are available in the Breaths & Pauses palette (Advanced workspace).

Add symbol

To add a breath, or pause (aka caesura / "tram lines" / "railroad tracks") to the score, use one of the following options:

Select a note or rest and double-click a breath or pause symbol in a palette

Drag a breath or pause symbol from a palette onto a note or rest in the score.

The symbol is placed after the note. Its position can be adjusted by editing the X and Y offsets in theInspector, or, in editmode, using the arrow keys.

Adjust pause length

You can adjust the pause length (in seconds) of the added symbol in theInspector.

Grace notes

A grace note is a type of musical ornament, usually printed smaller than regular notes. TheShort grace note, orAcciaccatura, appears as a small note with a stroke through the stem. TheLong grace note, or Appoggiatura, has nostroke.

Create grace notes

Grace notes can be found in the "Grace notes" palette in the Basic or Advanced workspace.

Add a grace note

Use one of the following methods:

Select a regular note and double click a grace note in apalette;

Drag a grace note symbol from a palette onto a regular note; Select a note and press / to create an acciaccatura only.

This will add a grace note of the same pitch as the regular note. To add asequence of grace notes to a regular note,simply repeat the above actions as many times as required. See also, Change pitch (below).

Note: When a grace note is added to the score, a slur isnot automatically created with it, so the latter needs to be addedseparately. See Slurs.

Add a chord of grace notes

Grace note chords are built up just like regular chords:

1. Enter the first note of the chord as shown above

2. Select this first grace note and enter subsequent notes as you would for any other regular chord (i.e.Shift+A...G).

90You can also create a grace note chord by using theadd interval shortcut in step 2: Alt+1...9 for intervals from a unison toa ninth above.

Change pitch

The pitch of a grace note can be adjusted just like a regular one:

1. Select one or more grace notes

2. Adjust pitch using the keyboard arrow commands, namely: ↑ or ↓ to increase or decrease the pitch by a semitone; Alt+Shift+↑ or Alt+Shift+↓ to increase or decrease the pitch one step at a time, according to the key signature.

Change duration

If you want to change the duration of a previously created grace note, select it and choose a duration from the toolbar orenter with one of the keys 1...9 (see Note input).

Manual adjustment

The position of a grace note after a note (such as a trill termination) may have to be adjusted by selecting the note, goinginto edit mode and using the left/right keyboard arrows; or change the chord offset values in the Inspector.

External links

Grace note at Wikipedia

Appoggiatura at Wikipedia Acciaccatura at Wikipedia

Hairpins

Add a hairpin

Hairpins are symbols used to indicate gradual changes in volume in the score. There are two kinds:crescendo (gettinglouder) and decrescendo (getting quieter).

To create a hairpin:

1. Select a range of notes or measures;

2. Use one of the following shortcuts: < : to create a crescendo hairpin. > : to create a diminuendo hairpin (decrescendo).

Alternatively, use one of the following options:

Select a range of notes or measures, and double-click a hairpin in a palette.

Drag and drop a hairpin from a palette onto a staff line.

Adjust length and height

A hairpins is a type of Line with playback properties, and its length is adjusted similarly:

1. Double-click on the hairpin to enter edit mode. Then click on the end handle that you want to move:

91 2. Use one of the following shortcuts:

Shift+→ to move the end handle, and its anchor, right by one note or rest. Shift+← to move the end handle, and its anchor, left by one note or rest;

This method of extending or shortening the hairpin maintainsplayback integrity and allows it to cross line breaks:

3. To fine-tune the horizontal position of an end-handle (without changing playback), use the following shortcuts:

→ to move the handle right by 0.1sp.

← to move the handle left 0.1 sp. Ctrl+→ (Mac: Cmd+→) to move the handle right one sp. Ctrl+← (Mac: Cmd+→) to move the handle left one sp.

To change the height of a hairpin:

Adjust the lower handle at the mouth of the hairpin (e.g. the blue square below):

Cresc. and dim. lines

In addition to hairpins, there arecresc. _ _ _and dim. _ _ _lines with the same function in theLines palette.You can adjust the text, if desired, in the Text Line Core section of the Inspector.

To turn a hairpin into its equivalent text line:

Select the hairpin and, in the Hairpin section of the Inspector, select the appropriate line from "Type."

Copy hairpins

From version 3.1, a hairpin can be cut, copied and pasted just like a text element: seeSummary of cut / copy / pastecommands.

For versions prior to 3.1, you can only duplicate a hairpin: seeCopying lines.

Edit hairpin properties

Properties of the hairpin can be edited in the Inspector, as follows:

Element: Edit the Y offset to change the height of the hairpin above or below the staff. Line: Edit line properties such as color, line style and thickness. Text line core: Add text and set text properties. Hairpin: Type: Change the type of hairpin: crescendo, decrescendo or text. Circled tip: Tick box to activate. Height: The width at the mouth of the hairpin. Continue height: The width of the hairpin at the end of a system, before it continues to the next system. Placement: Set hairpin above or below the staff. Dynamic range: Specify whether hairpin playback applies to a staff, part (default) or a system. Velocity change: … across the span of the hairpin; from 0 to 127. Use single note dynamics (as of version 3.1): When checked (default), allows the hairpin to change the dynamic of a single note if the instrument supports single note dynamics. Dynamic Mode (as of version 3.1): Set the method used to change the dynamic: Linear (default), Ease-in and out, Ease-in, Ease-out, or Exponential.

Hairpin playback

Prior to version 3.1 crescendo and diminuendo lines only affected playback from one note to the next: they had no effect

92on the playback of a single note or a series of tied notes.

As of version 3.1, hairpins affect single notes and tied notes on instruments that support single note dynamics. Forexample, a piano cannot have a crescendo on a single note, but a trumpet can.

By default, hairpins will affect playback only ifdynamics are used before and after the hairpin. For example, acrescendo spanning notes between p and f dynamics will cause a dynamic change on playback. However, between anytwo successive dynamics only the first appropriate hairpin will have effect: a diminuendo between p and f will be ignored; iftwo or more crescendos are between p and f, all but the first will be ignored.

A hairpin may be used without dynamic marks, by adjusting "Velocity change" in theInspector (values in the range 0 to127).

Lines

The Lines palette of the Advanced workspace contains the following lines:

As you can see, the palette includes: Slurs, Hairpins, Volta brackets, Octave lines, and many others.

Applying lines to the score

Most lines (except Slurs, Volta brackets and the Ambitus) can be applied from a palette in the following ways:

To apply a line to just one note

1. Click on a note, then Ctrl+Click on the next note;

2. Double-click a line.

To apply a line across a range of notes

1. Select a range of notes;

2. Double-click a line.

To apply a line from a note to the end of that measure

Use any of the following methods:

Click on a note, then double click a line.

Drag and drop a line onto the score.

To apply a line across a range of measures

93 1. Select one or more measures; 2. Double click a line in a palette.

Lines and playback properties

Some lines, such as Hairpins, Voltas, Ottavas etc., have a playback effect as well as being indicative. Eachend handle isconnected by a dotted line to an anchor on the staff (visible in Edit mode). These anchors indicate the extent of theplayback effect.

Adjust vertical position

In Normal mode, apply one of the following methods:

Click on one or more lines and change the vertical offset in theInspector; Click on a line, press and hold Shift and drag it up/down with a mouse.

Note: You can also adjust the vertical position inEdit mode.

Change length

1. Enter Edit mode and click on an end handle;

2. Apply one of the following shortcuts:

Shift+→ to move the end handle, and its anchor, right by one note (or, in the case ofVoltas, one measure) Shift+← to move the end handle, and its anchor, left by one note (or, in the case of Voltas, one measure);

Note: This method allows the line to span systems when required, and ensures that playback coincides with the line's visual extent.

3. if you wish to change the position of an end handlewithout changing the position of its anchor, apply one of the following:

→ to move the handle right by 0.1sp (1 sp = one staff space = the distance between two staff lines). ← to move the handle left 0.1 sp. Ctrl+→ (Mac: Cmd+→) to move the handle right one sp. Ctrl+← (Mac: Cmd+→) to move the handle left one sp.

Note: You can also drag the endpoint handles with a mouse.

Text lines

A text line is a line that has text embedded within it—such as a volta, ottava, guitar barre line etc.

When you apply a text line to the score from a palette, theline properties always remain unchanged, but the textproperties may, under certain circumstances, assume those of the current style for text lines. For details, see Behavior ofapplied text and lines.

Custom lines

Any line in the score can be customized by adjusting its properties in theInspector, as follows:

1. Select the line;

2. If line hooks are needed, make a selection from Begin hook, End hook and Height (in the Text Line Core section); 3. To add text, tick Begin Text, Continue Text or End Text, then type in the "Text" box: Begin: Text added here appears at the beginning of the line; Continue: Text added here appears at the beginning of a continuation line; End: Text added here appears at the end of the line; 4. Edit text properties and alignment as required; 5. Edit Placement: "Above" or "Below" sets the text so that it is on the line. "Left" places the text to the left of the line; 6. Make adjustments to the line color, thickness and style (solid, dashed etc.) in theLine section. The Diagonal option allows you to create a diagonal line by dragging the end handles; 7. To save the result for future use, see Custom palettes.

94Copying lines

Once applied to the score, lines cannot be copied using the usualcopy and paste procedures. However, you canduplicate lines within a score:

Press and hold Ctrl+Shift (Mac: Cmd+Shift), click on the line and drag it to the desired location.

Extended ornament lines

To add an accidental to an extended ornament, such as a trill line, select the line and double-click a symbol from theAccidentals palette.

External links

Piano pedal marks at Wikipedia

Guitar Barre at Wikipedia

Measure rests

Full measure rest

A whole rest, centered within a measure (shown below), is used to indicate that an entire measure (or a voice within ameasure) is silent, regardless of time signature.

To create one or more full measure rests

Use the following method if all selected measures are "standard"—i.e. with nocustom durations:

1 Select a measure, or range of measures.

2. Press Del.

If one or more of the measures contains acustom duration, use the following method instead:

1. Select a measure, or range of measures.

2. Press Ctrl+Shift+Del (Mac: Cmd+Shift+Del).

To create a full measure rest in a particular voice

1. In the appropriate voice, enter a rest that extends for the full measure. 2. Make sure the rest is selected, then press Ctrl+Shift+Del (Mac: Cmd+Shift+Del).

Multimeasure rest

A Multimeasure rest indicates a period of silence for an instrument: the number of measures is shown by the numberabove the staff.

To turn multimeasure rests on or off:

Press M on your keyboard.

1. From the menu, choose Format→Style....

Note: It is recommended that you enter all notes in the score firstbefore enabling multi-measure rests.

Break multimeasure rest

You may want to have a multi-measure rest divided into two multi-measure rests:

1. Ensure that the option to display multimeasure rests in the score isoff (see above). 2. Right-click on the measure where you want the second multi-measure rest to start; 3. From the menu, chose Measure Properties and tick "Break multi-measure rest."

See also: Measure operations: Break multimeasure rest.

Octave lines

Octave (Ottava) lines are used to indicate that a section of music is to be played one or more octaves above or belowwritten pitch: The line may be dotted or solid. Ottavas are available in the Lines palette of the Basic and Advancedworkspaces.

8─────┐or 8va─────┐: Play one octave above written pitch

8─────┘or 8va─────┘: Play one octave below written pitch

8va alta/bassa lines are particularly common in piano scores, though they are sometimes used in other instrumentalmusic.1 15ma alta (2 octaves above) and 15ma bassa (2 octaves below) are also occasionally used.

MuseScore automatically adjusts playback of the score under the ottava to the correct pitch.

Apply an octave line

See Applying lines to the score.

And to adjust the vertical position, see Lines: Adjust vertical position.

Change length

See Lines: Change length.

Custom lines

Ottavas can be customized just like any other line. SeeCustom lines and line properties.

Properties unique to Octave lines can be adjusted in theOttava section of the Inspector:

Type: Change the Ottava line text.

Placement: Set to "Above" or "Below" the staff. Numbers only: Untick for both number and text (e.g. "8va"). Tick for a number only (e.g. "8").

A slur is a curved line between two or more notes indicating that they are to be playedlegato—smoothly and withoutseparation. Not to be confused with Ties, which join two notes of the same pitch.

There are a number of ways to add a slur to a score, and all may be useful depending on the context (adding a slur fromthe lines palette is also possible but not recommended).

Add slur in note-input mode

1. While in Note input mode, type in the first note in the slurred section; 2. Press S to begin the slurred section; 3. Type in the remaining notes in the slurred section; 4. Press S again to end the slurred section.

Add slur in Normal mode

Method 1

1. Make sure you are in Normal mode;

2. Select the note where you want the slur to start:

3. Press S to add a slur extending to the next note:

4. (Optional) Hold Shift and press → (right arrow key) to extend the slur to the next note. Repeat as required:

5. (Optional) Press X to flip the slur direction:

6. Press Esc to exit edit mode:

Method 2

1. Make sure you are in Normal mode;

2. Select the note where you want the slur to start; 3. Chose one of the following options: To add a slur to one voice only: Hold down Ctrl (⌘ on a Mac) and select the last note that you want the slur to cover. To add slurs to all voices: Hold down Shift (⌘ on a Mac) and select the last note that you want the slurs to cover. 4. Press S.

Adjust slur

97If you only want to adjust the position of a slur:

1. Select the slur;

2. Use any of the following methods: Drag the slur. Adjust the horizontal and vertical offset values in theInspector.

To adjust all the properties of a slur (length, shape and position):

1. Make sure you are not in note input mode;

2. Double-click the slur to enter edit mode (or select it and press Ctrl+E; or right-click it and select "Edit Element"); 3. Click on a handle to select it, or use Tab to cycle through the handles; 4. To move the left and right handles from note to note, use the following shortcuts: Shift+→: Move to next note. Shift+←: Move to previous note. Shift+↑ : Move to lower voice (voice 2 to voice 1 etc.). Shift+↓ : Move to higher voice (voice 1 to voice 2 etc.). 5. To adjust the position of any handle, use any of the following methods: Drag the handle. Use the arrow keys for fine adjustment (0.1 sp. at a time). For larger adjustments (1 sp. at a time) use Ctrl+Arrow. 6. Press Esc to exit edit mode.

Note: The two outer handles adjust the start and end of the slur, whilst the three handles on the curve adjust the contour.The middle handle on the straight line is used to move the whole slur up/down/left/right.

Extended slurs

A slur can span several systems and pages. The start and end of a slur is anchored to a note/chord or rest. If the notesare repositioned due to changes in the layout, stretch or style, the slur also moves and adjusts in size.

This example shows a slur spanning from the bass to the treble clef. Using the mouse, select the first note of the slur, holddown Ctrl (Mac: ⌘) and select the last note for the slur, and pressS to add the slur.

X flips the direction of a selected slur.

Dotted slurs

Dotted slurs are sometimes used in songs where the presence of a slur varies between stanzas. Dotted slurs are alsoused to indicate an editor's suggestion (as opposed to the composer's original markings). To change an existing slur intoa dotted or dashed slur, select it and then in Inspector (F8) change Line type from Continuous to Dotted or Dashed.

See also

Tie Edit mode Note input

Ties

A tie is a curved line between two notes of thesame pitch, indicating that they are to be played as one combined note(see external links below). Ties are normally created between adjacent notes in the samevoice, but MuseScore alsosupports ties between non-adjacent notes and between notes in different voices.

In note-input mode, if you specify a tie immediately after entering a note or chord, the program automatically generates thecorrect destination notes to go with the ties. Or, you can simply create ties "after the fact," between existing notes.

Note: Ties, which join notes of the same pitch, should not be confused with slurs, which join notes of different pitches and

98indicate legato articulation.

Add ties to single notes

In Normal mode:

1. Click on a note, or use Ctrl (Mac: Cmd) + click to select more than one note:

2. Press + or the toolbar tie button, :

Ties will be created between the selected note(s) and the following note(s) of the same pitch.

In Note input mode:

1. Select a single note (one that is not part of a chord).

2. Select a new note duration for the following note, if required (but see "Note" below).

3. Press + or the tie button, .

Note: This shortcut works, as described above, only if there is no chord following the selected note. If there is, then theduration is ignored and the tied note is added instead to the following chord.

Add ties to chords

In Normal mode:

1. Use one of the following selection options:

Hold down Shift and click on any note in the chord; Click on the stem of the chord;

2. Press +, or click on the toolbar tie button .

Ties will be created between all the notes in the selected chord and the following notes of the same pitches.

In Note input mode:

1. Make sure one note is selected in a chord.

2. Select a new note duration for the following chord, if required (but see "Note" below). 3. Press + or the tie button, .

Note: This shortcut works, as described above, only if there is no chord following the selected note. If there is, then theduration is ignored and the tied notes are added instead to the following chord.

Flip a tie

X flips the direction of a selected tie, from above the note to below the note, or vice-versa.

See also

Slur

External links

How to create ties leading into a 2nd ending

Ties (music) at Wikipedia

Tremolo

99Tremolo is the rapid repetition of one note or chord, or a rapid alternation between two notes or chords. Tremolo symbolscan be found in the Tremolo palette in the advanced workspace: both one note and two note tremolos are possible.

A one-note or one-chord tremolo is indicated by strokes through the stem of the note or chord (or above/below if awhole note). E.g.

In a two-note or two-chord tremolo, bars are drawn between the notes. E.g.

Tremolo symbols are also used to notate drum rolls.

Add a Tremolo

Single note/chord tremolo

1. If a single note, select that note; if a chord, select any note in the chord; 2. Double-click the desired symbol in the Tremolo palette.

Alternatively, you can drag the tremolo symbol onto the applicable note.

Two note/chord tremolo

1. Input the notes at half the desired final duration;

2. If a single note, select the first note of the pair; if a chord, select any note from the first chord; 3. Double-click the desired symbol in the Tremolo palette.

Alternatively, you can drag the tremolo symbol onto the applicable note.

Example: To enter a two-note tremolo with the duration of a half note (minim), enter two normal quarter notes (crotchets).After applying a tremolo symbol to the first note, the note values automatically double to half notes.

External links

Tremolo (Wikipedia)

Tuplets

Tuplets are used to write rhythms beyond the beat divisions usually permitted by the time signature. For example, atripletconsists of three notes in the time of two:

And a duplet consists of two notes in the time of three:

Create a tuplet

The exact method of tuplet entry depends on whether you are starting off inNote input mode or Normal mode. We'll startoff with a simple example: the creation of an eighth note triplet.

100Create a triplet in normal mode

1. Select a note or rest that specifies the full duration of the desired triplet group. In the case of an eighth note triplet, you will need to select a quarter note or rest—as in the example below:

2. Press the keyboard shortcut for a triplet, Ctrl+3 (Mac: ⌘+3); alternatively use the menu, Add→Tuplets→Triplet. This will give the following result:

3. The program automatically changes to note-input mode and selects the most appropriate duration—in this example an eighth note. Now enter the desired series of notes/rests. For example:

Create a triplet in note input mode

1. Ensure you are in note input mode (press N).

2. Navigate to the note/rest (or blank measure) where you want the triplet to start (use the left/right arrow keys as required). 3. Select a final duration for the whole triplet group. In the case of an eighth note triplet, click on the quarter note in the note input toolbar (or press 5 on the keyboard). 4. Press the keyboard shortcut for a tuplet, Ctrl+3 (Mac: ⌘+3); alternatively, use the menu, Add→Tuplets→Triplet. This creates a triplet number/bracket and appropriately divides the original note/rest (see image above). 5. The program automatically selects the most appropriate duration—in this example an eighth note—allowing you to immediately start entering the desired series of notes/rests.

Create other tuplets

To create other tuplets substitute one of the following commands at the relevant step above:

Press Ctrl+2–9 (Mac: Cmd+2–9). 2 for a duplet, 3 for a triplet etc.

From the menu, select Add→Tuplets, then click on the desired option.

For more complex cases, see below.

Custom tuplets

To create other tuplets than the default options (e.g. 13 sixteenth notes in the space of one quarter note):

1. In Note input mode, select a note duration equaling the total duration of the tuplet; or, if inNormal mode, select a note or rest of the desired overall duration; 2. Open the Create Tuplet dialog from the menu: Add→Tuplets→Other...;

3. Select the desired number ratio (e.g. 13/4 for thirteen sixteenth notes in the space of a quarter note) under "Relation" in the "Type" section. Specify "Number" and "Bracket" using the radio buttons in the "Format" section;

101 4. Click OK to close the dialog:

5. Enter the desired series of notes/rests.

Delete a tuplet

Select the number/bracket and press Del.

Change display of tuplets

Using the Inspector

To change the display properties of tuplets in the score, select the tuplet numbers/brackets, and adjust the desiredproperties in the "Tuplet" section of the Inspector:

Direction: Auto places the bracket/number in thedefault position. Up always places the bracket above the note heads; Down always places the bracket below the note heads. Number type: Choice of Number, Ratio, or Nothing. Bracket type: Automatic hides the bracket for beamed notes and shows the bracket if the tuplet includes unbeamed notes or rests. Bracket displays the bracket. Nothing hides the bracket.

Using the Tuplets Style dialog

To make fine adjustments to the way that all tuplets in the score are displayed: from the menu, selectFormat →Style...→Tuplets .

The legend below illustrates some of the properties that can be adjusted in the Tuplets style dialog:

102(2) Vertical distance from stem.(3) Vertical distance from note head.(5) Distance before stem of first note.(6) Distance after stem of last note.

External links

How to create triplets and other tuplets

How to create nonstandard tuplets Tuplet at Wikipedia The User Guide to Tuplets in MuseScore [video]

Repeats and jumps

Simple repeats

You can create a simple repeat by placing a start and an end repeat barline at the beginning and end of a passage.These can be applied from the Barlines or Repeats & Jumps palette.

Note: If the start of a repeat coincides with thebeginning of a piece or section, the start repeat barline can be omitted ifdesired. Similarly, an end repeat barline can be omitted at the end of a score or section.

1st and 2nd endings

First create a simple repeat (as shown above), then apply the first and second time endings—seeVoltas.

Playback

To hear repeats during playback, make sure the "Play Repeats" button on the toolbar is selected. Likewise, you canturn off repeats during playback by deselecting the button.

To set the number of times that a repeat section plays back:

1. Make sure the start and end repeat barlines are in place (e.g.simple repeats above). 2. Right-click on the last measure containing the end repeat barline and selectMeasure properties. 3. Adjust "Play count" as required.

Repeat symbols and text

Text and symbols related to repeats are located in the "Repeats & Jumps" palette (in the Basic and Advancedworkspaces). This palette contains:

Symbols for measure repeat, Segno, Coda, and repeat barlines

D.S., D.C., To Coda, and Fine text

103To add a repeat symbol to the score use either of the following:

Drag and drop a repeat symbol from the palette onto (not above!) the desired measure (so the measure changes color). Select a measure, then double-click the desired repeat symbol in the palette.

Jumps

Jumps are symbols in the score which tell the musician, and playback, to skip to a namedmarker (see below). Jumpsinclude the various kinds of D.C. (Da Capo) and D.S. (Dal Segno) text.

Just like with simple repeats, make sure the "Play Repeats" button on the toolbar is selected so the jumps arehonored. Likewise, you can turn off jumps during playback by deselecting the button.

If you click on a jump, some text boxes and a checkbox are displayed in theJump section of the Inspector. These havethe following effects on playback:

Jump to: Playback jumps to the marker whose "Label" is the same as the "Jump to" tag. Play until: Playback continues until it reaches a marker whose "Label" is the same as the "Play until" tag. Continue at: Playback jumps to the next marker whose "Label" is the same as the "Continue" tag. Play repeats: Ticking this box tells MuseScore to play repeats after D.C. (Da Capo) or D.S. (Dal Segno) jumps. If this option is not ticked then simple Repeats are not taken after jumps and playback works as if it were the last repeat.

Note: The tags start and end, referring to the beginning and end of a score orsection, are implicit and don't need to beadded by the user.

Markers

Markers are the places referred to by thejumps. A list of markers (in addition to the implicit "start" and "end") follows:

: Segno (tag: segno)

: Segno Variation (tag: varsegno)

: Coda (tag: codab)

: Coda Variation (tag: varcoda)

Fine: (tag: fine) To Coda: (tag: coda)

If you click on a marker, the following properties appears in theMarker section of the Inspector:

Marker type: This can be changed from the dropdown list, if required. Label: This is the (identifier) tag associated with the marker. See also,Jumps (above).

Examples of jumps

Da Capo (D.C.): At the "D.C." sign, playback jumps to the start (i.e. to the implicitstart tag) and plays the entire score or section again (i.e. up to the implicit end tag). Da Capo (D.C.) al Fine: At the "D.C. al Fine" sign, playback jumps to the start (i.e. to the implicitstart tag) and plays the score up to the Fine (i.e. the fine tag).

104 Dal Segno (D.S.) al Fine: At the "D.S. al Fine" sign, playback jumps to theSegno symbol (i.e. the segno tag) and then plays up to the Fine (i.e. the fine tag) Dal Segno (D.S.) al Coda: At the "D.S. al Coda" sign, playback jumps to theSegno symbol (i.e. the segno tag) and then plays up to the To Coda (i.e. the coda tag). Playback then continues at the Coda symbol (i.e. the codab tag).

Note: The properties (i.e. the tag names) of jumps and markers can be set via theInspector. You need to modify them ifusing multiple jumps and markers.

See also

Barlines Volta

External links

MuseScore in Minutes: Repeats and Endings, part 2 (video tutorial)

How to separate a coda from the rest of the score (MuseScore HowTo)

Voltas

Volta brackets, or first and second ending brackets, are used to mark different endings for a repeat.

To add a volta to the score

Use one of the following methods:

Select a measure, or range of measures and double-click a Volta icon in theLines palette. Drag-and-drop a volta from the Lines palette, then adjust the length as required (see below).

To change the number of measures that a volta covers

1. Double-click the volta to enter edit mode. The end handle is automatically selected. 2. Press Shift+→ to move the end handle forward one measure. Press Shift+← to move the handle backward one measure. Repeat as required.

Note: Only the Shift commands will alter the playback start and end points of the volta. To make fine adjustments to thevisual start or end points you can use other keyboard arrow commands, or drag the handles with a mouse, but these donot affect the playback properties.

When you select a start or end handle, a dashed line appears connecting it to ananchor point on the staff. This anchorshows the position of the playback start or end point of the Volta.

Volta properties

To make changes to Volta text:

Select the volta, and edit the properties in theText Line Core section of the Inspector.

105To specify the order of repeats:

Select the volta, and in "Repeat list" (Volta section of the Inspector) type in a number, or sequence of numbers separated by commas, to indicate the repeat(s) in which the volta is to be played.

For example, a first ending shows the number "1"; a second ending, the number "2" and so on. More complex repeatsare also possible: e.g. a "Repeat list" displaying "1, 2, 4, 5, 7" indicates that the volta is to be played during repeats 1, 2,4, 5, and 7, and so on.

Playback

Sometimes a repeat plays more than two times. If you want to change the number of times MuseScore plays a repeat, goto the measure containing the end repeat barline and change its "Play count". See Measure operations: Other properties.

External links

MuseScore in Minutes, Lesson 8: Repeats and Endings, Part 1

How to create ties leading into a 2nd ending

Transposition

Transposition is the act of raising or lowering the pitch of a selection of notes by the sameinterval. You can chose totranspose notes either manually or by using the Transpose dialog.

Manual transposition

1. Select the notes that you wish to transpose;

2. Use any of the following options: To transpose chromatically: Press ↑ or ↓ . Repeat as required; To transpose diatonically; Press Alt + Shift + ↑ or ↓ . Repeat as required; To transpose by an octave: Press Ctrl + ↑ or ↓ (Mac: Cmd + ↑ or ↓ ).

Automatic transposition

MuseScore's Transpose dialog gives you more options for transposing notes.

106Note: By default this dialog opens from the Tools menu, but you can also chose to open it using a keyboard shortcut (seePreferences).

107Transposing instruments, such as the B-flat trumpet or E-flat alto sax, sound lower, or higher than their written pitch.MuseScore has a number of features to facilitate the scoring of these instruments.

Concert pitch

MuseScore's default viewing mode shows the musical notation inwritten pitch, but you can chose to display the score inconcert pitch instead. In the latter mode, the musical notation ofall instruments matches the actual pitches that you hearon playback.

To change the view to concert pitch: Press the Concert Pitch button to highlight it.

You should ensure that the Concert pitch button is OFF before printing the main score or any parts.

Change staff transposition

Instrument transpositions are already set up in MuseScore. However, if you want a rare instrument or transposition that isnot available in MuseScore, you may need to edit the instrument transposition manually.

1. Right-click an empty part of the instrument staff and select Staff/Part Properties.... 2. At the bottom of the window, select the interval of transposition, any octave shifts, and whether the interval is "Up" (sounds higher than written) or "Down" (sounds lower than written).

You can also use the Change Instrument… button in the Staff/Part Properties window to automatically change thetransposition to that of a different standard instrument.

External links

How to transpose (MuseScore How-To)

Concert pitch or not? (forum discussion)

Drum notation

Entering percussion notation is somewhat different to entering notation for pitched instruments (such as the piano orviolin).

Percussion staff types

When you create a percussion staff using theNew Score Wizard or the Instruments dialog, MuseScore automaticallychoses the most appropriate staff type (1-, 3-, or 5-line) for the instrument: this can be changed, if required, using the"Staff type" column on the Choose instruments / Instruments page. Any additional changes (e.g. to a 2-line staff) can bemade from the score itself (see Advanced Style Properties).

On a 5-line percussion staff, each instrument is assigned a vertical staff position (line or space) and a notehead shape.For a drumset, one or two voices can be used. If the latter, voice 1 (the upper voice) usually contains (up-stem) notesplayed by the hands while voice 2 (the lower voice) usually contains (down-stem) notes played by the feet (see imagebelow).

Note input methods

You can add notes to a percussion staff from any of the following:

External MIDI keyboard;

Piano keyboard (virtual); Computer keyboard; Mouse.

These methods can be used in any desired combination:

MIDI keyboard

108To add notes to a percussion staff from a MIDI keyboard:

1. Ensure that the MIDI keyboard is connected and functioning correctly.

Note: If you click on the percussion staff without enteringnote input mode, you can demo the percussion instruments from the MIDI keyboard.

2. Click on the note or rest where you want to start.

3. Enter note input mode.

4. Select the correct voice. For example, snares, sidesticks and all cymbals are normally added to voice 1; bass drum to voice 2. 5. Set note duration. 6. Press an instrument key to add a note to the score. To add another note at the same position, keep the first key held down while pressing the second key.

Note: Refer to a GM2 drum map for details about which MIDI keyboard key corresponds to which percussion instrument.Some keyboards (e.g., Casio) display percussion symbols next to the keys as an aid to the user.

To add notes to a percussion staff from the virtualPiano Keyboard:

Note: If you click on the percussion staff without enteringnote input mode, you can demo the percussion instruments from the Piano keyboard.

2. Click on the note or rest where you want to start.

3. Enter note input mode.

4. Select the correct voice. For example, snares, sidesticks and all cymbals are normally added to voice 1; bass drum to voice 2. 5. Set note duration. 6. Click on a (virtual piano) key to add a note to the score. 7. To add another note to an existing one, pressShift and hold it while pressing the new note (in versions before 2.1, use Ctrl (Mac: Cmd)).

Note: Refer to a GM2 drum map for details about which piano key corresponds to which percussion instrument.

By default, the piano keyboard is docked at the bottom of the screen—to the left of the Drum input palette. However youcan undock it by dragging, then dock the panel in several ways:

Drag the panel downwards to the center and it will overlay the Drum input palette, full length. Both panels can then be accessed by Tabs. Drag the panel downwards to the right/left and it will dock to the right/left of the Drum input palette.

Computer keyboard

To enter notes on a percussion staff using your computer keyboard:

1. Click on the note or rest where you want to start.

2. Enter note input mode. The Drum input palette now appears at the bottom of the screen (seebelow). 3. Select the desired note duration. 4. Press the shortcut key (A–G) for the instrument that you wish to enter—refer to the Drum input palette window. 5. If you wish to add another note to an existing one in that voice, press Shift + [A–G].

Note: Voice allocation is determined by the color of the note in the drum input palette: blue for voice 1, green for voice 2.

Mouse

To add a note to a percussion staff

Use the following method to add anew note or to replace an existing chord.

1. Select the note or rest where you want to start. You can also select ameasure.

109 2. Press N to enter note input mode. The Drum input palette now appears at the bottom of the screen (seebelow). 3. Set note duration. 4. Choose one of the following options: Double-click a note in the Drum input palette. Select a note (e.g. Bass drum, or Snare) in theDrum input palette, then click a note or rest in the score.

To add a note to an existing chord in the percussion staff

1. Ensure you are in note input mode.

2. Select a note duration equal to the note you are adding to. 3. Click on the new note in the Drum input palette. 4. Click above or below the existing note in the percussion staff.

Note: Voice allocation is determined by the color of the note in the drum input palette: blue for voice 1, green for voice 2.

Drum input palette

When a percussion staff is selected and note input mode is ON, a window opens at the bottom of the screen called theDrum input palette. This window is essential for mouse input, and displays shortcuts for computer keyboard input, butcan be ignored if using a MIDI keyboard or the virtual Piano Keyboard.

Each note in the palette represents a percussion instrument: hovering the mouse pointer over the note displays theinstrument name.

The letters A–G (shown above certain notes in the palette) are designated as shortcuts for entering particular instruments(bass drum, snare, closed hi-hat etc.), rather than referring to note pitches. They can be changed or reallocated asdesired in the Edit Drumset window.

When the Drum input palette is open, double-clicking a note in the palette or entering a shortcut letter will add thatinstrument note to the percussion staff. The color of the note in the palette shows the voice allocated for that note—bluefor voice 1, green for voice 2. This can be changed in the Edit Drumset dialog if required.

This voice allocation applies only to keyboard and mouse entry of notes: entry via a MIDI keyboard or the virtual Pianokeyboard allows any voice to be used.

Edit Drumset

To open the Edit Drumset window, use one of the following options:

Click on the Edit Drumset button at the left of theDrum input palette. Right-click on a percussion staff and select "Edit Drumset...".

110The Edit Drumset dialog displays the percussion instruments available and the MIDI notes/numbers to which they areallocated. It also determines how each instrument is displayed on the staff— its name, position, notehead type and note-stem direction. Any changes made here are automatically saved in the parent MuseScore file.

Clicking on a row in the left-hand column allows you to edit the display properties for that note as follows:

Name: The name you want displayed in the Drum input palette when you mouse over the note.Notehead group: Choose a notehead for that instrument from a drop-down list of options (Note: chosing "Custom"activates "Edit noteheads" (below).Edit Noteheads: Allows you to customize the display further by specifying the noteheads for particular note durations.Default voice: Assign to one of four voices. This does not affect input from a MIDI keyboard or the virtual Piano keyboard.Staff line: This number indicates the staff line/space on which the note is displayed. "0" means that the note is displayedon the top line of the 5-line staff. Negative numbers move the note upwards step by step, while positive numbers move itdownwards in the same way.Shortcut: Assign a keyboard shortcut to enter that note.Stem Direction: Auto, Up or down.

The customized drumset can be saved as a .drm file by pressingSave. You can also import a customized drumset usingthe Load button.

Music for fretted, stringed instruments is commonly notated using tablature, also known as tab, which provides a visualrepresentation of the strings and fret numbers:

Tablature can also be combined with traditional staff notation:

Create a new tablature staff

If you wish to create tablature as part of a new score, use theNew Score Wizard. If you want to add tablature to anexisting score, use the Instruments dialog. Or, alternatively, you can convert an existing standard staff. See below fordetails.

With the New Score wizard

111To create tablature in a new score (for combined staff/tablature systems see →below):

1. Open the New Score wizard.

2. Enter the score details (optional). Click Next. 3. On the Chose template file page, click on Choose Instruments under "General". 4. On the Instruments page, select the desired tablature in the "Strings – plucked" category, in the left-hand column. Then click Add. 5. Complete the rest of the New Score Wizard.

Note: If the desired tablature is not available in theChoose Instrument list, add a tablature staff anyway at step 4(above). Then edit the tablature to your exact requirements using the Staff/Part properties dialog.

With the Instruments dialog

To add a single tablature staff to an existing score (for combined staff/tab system seebelow):

1. Open the instruments dialog (press I; or from the menu bar, select Edit → Instruments…). 2. Add the tab staff as described inAdd instruments ("Create a new score").

By changing staff type

To convert an existing standard staff to tablature, or tablature to a standard staff:

1. Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties…. If "Instrument" is already set to a plucked-strings type, then exit staff properties and go to step 3. 2. If "Instrument" is not a plucked-strings type, click on Change instrument and select an appropriate instrument from "Strings – Plucked." 3. Click on Advanced Style properties , select the appropriate tablature option from "Template", then press< Reset to Template . You can fine tune the display if necessary using the "Fret Marks" and "Note Values" tabs. 4. Click OK twice to exit.

Edit string data

Change tuning

Note: If you only want to view (rather than change) the instrument tuning, follow steps 1 and 2 only.

4. Select a new pitch in the Note Selection box and click OK. Or, alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. 5. Click OK to close the "String Data" dialog box. Then click OK to close the "Staff/Part Properties" dialog.

Notes: (1) If tuning is changed when the tablature for that instrument already contains some notes, fret marks will beadjusted automatically (if possible); (2) Any change of tuning to a particular instrument applies only to the score at hand,and does not change any program default settings.

Add a string

1. Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties…, then press Edit String Data. 2. Click on a string pitch and select New String... . 3. Select the new pitch and press OK—or, alternatively, just double-click the new pitch. The new string is inserted below the selected string.

Note: After adding a tablature string you will need to adjust the number of lines in theStaff/Part properties dialog.

Note: After deleting a tablature string you will need to adjust the number of lines in theStaff/Part properties dialog.

Mark unfretted string "open"

This feature is used to mark a (bass) course as unstopped (i.e. outside of the fingerboard and always sounding open): ason a Baroque lute or Theorbo etc. This means that only "0" (zero) or "a" is accepted as a fret mark: any other fret mark willbe converted to 0/a.

1. Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties…, then press Edit String Data. 2. Check one or more boxes in the "Open" column.

Change number of instrument frets

This property defines the maximum fret number which can be entered on a tablature staff.

1. Right-click on the staff, select Staff/Part Properties…, then press Edit String Data. 2. Select or enter a new number in the "Number of frets" spin box.

Change tablature display

You can customize both the appearance of a tablature staff and the way that it displays the fret marks. To access theseoptions:

1. Right click on the staff and select Staff/Part Properties….

2. Click on the Advanced Style Properties… button.

113Combine pitched staff with tablature

Plucked-string instruments—such as the guitar—are commonly notated using both a music staffand tablature (TAB)together. MuseScore gives you the option of having the two staves either unlinked or linked:

1. Unlinked Staves: The advantage of using this option is that each staff can be edited independently. To transfer music notation from one staff to the other, select the desired range and copy and paste it onto the other staff.

2. Linked Staves: The staves are "mutually updating": i.e. any change you make to the notation in one staff is immediately applied to the other staff as well.

A note on fret mark conflicts: When the same note is entered in two different voices, MuseScore tries to ensure that thefret marks do not overlap on the same string. Any overlaps which do occur are marked with red squares: these appearonly in the document window and not on any printed copy. In almost all cases (e.g. frets 0 to 4 on the 6th string),overlapping is the desired result and no further adjustment is required. You can hide the red marks by selecting "View"and unticking "Show Unprintable."

Create a new staff/tablature pair with the New Score Wizard

1. Open the New Score wizard.

2. Enter the score details (optional). Click Next. 3. On the Chose template file page, click on Choose Instruments under "General". 4. Select a pitched staff in the "Strings – Plucked" section of the left-hand column. Then clickAdd. 5. Select the newly-created staff line (i.e. marked "Staff …") in the right-hand column and chose one of two options: Click Add Staff to create an unlinked staff/tab pair. Click Add Linked Staff to create a linked staff/tab pair. 6. In the Staff type column, click on the dropdown list for the newly-created staff and select a tablature option (this can be modified later, if required, on the score page—see Staff/Part Properties). 7. Change the staff order using the ↑ button if needed. 8. Complete the rest of the New Score Wizard, or clickFinish.

Create a new staff/tablature pair in an existing score

Create a staff/tablature pair from an existing staff

To add tablature to a plucked-string staff in the score (or vice versa):

1. Open the Instruments editor (press I, or from the menu bar, select Edit → Instruments…). 2. In the right-hand column, select the staff you want to create the staff/tab pair from, then follow one of the options shown in step 5 above. 3. Continue with steps 6–8 above.

Enter notes in tablature

Using a computer keyboard

1. In Normal mode, select the measure or existing note from which you want to begin note entry. 2. Switch to note input mode (N): a short 'blue rectangle' appears around one tablature string: this is the current string. 3. Select the duration of the note or rest that you wish to enter (see below). 4. Press the up/down arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired string. Use the left/right arrow keys to navigate through the score.

5. Press 0 to 9 to enter a fret mark from 0 to 9 on the current string; to enter numbers with several digits press each digit in sequence. Keys A to K (skipping I) can also be used: convenient when working in French tablature. ForL , M, N, use the alphanumeric keyboard and type respectively 10, 11, 12... (Note: You cannot enter a number higher than the "Number of frets" value set in the Edit String Data dialog).

Press ; (semicolon) to enter a rest of the selected duration.

114 6. You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff.

See also, Edit notes (below).

Historical tablature

Period notation for bass strings (lutes and sim.) is supported:

French tablature: letters with prefixed slash-like strokes right under the tab body: i.e. 7th string: "a", 8th string: "/a", 9th string: "//a" and so on, all in the first position below the tab body.

Italian tablature: numbers with 'ledger line'- like segment of string above the tab body: i.e. 7th string: "0" one position above the tab body with one 'ledger line'; 8th string: "0" two positions above the tab body with two 'ledger lines' and so on.

Input of fretmarks is via computer keyboard only: by moving the note entry cursor below (French) or above (Italian) the tabbody, 'shadow' slashes or ledger lines will indicate the target string to which the fret mark will be applied; pressing one ofthe fret keys, will enter (and lay out) the note on that string.

Using a mouse

To enter notes into tablature with a mouse:

Enter note input mode and select the note or rest duration (seebelow). Click on a string to create a note there. Notes are initially created on fret 0 (ora for French tablatures): to correct, type in the right number from the keyboard. You can also increase/decrease the fret mark using Alt+Shift+↑ or Alt+Shift+↓ . You can enter notes in different voices if required—just as you would in a standard staff.

See also, Edit notes (below).

Select note duration

In note input mode, you can use any of the following methods to set note duration in tablature:

Press Shift+1 to Shift+9: Sets duration from a 128th note to a longa (availability of these shortcuts may depend on the platform and/or keyboard layout); Press NumPad1 to NumPad9: Sets duration from a 128th note to a longa (if a numeric keypad exists and NumLock is on); Click on a note duration icon in the Note Input toolbar above the document window; Press Q to decrease the selected duration and W to increase it.

Edit notes

In Note input mode

To edit an existing fret mark in note-input mode:

Position the cursor above the fret mark and simply retype the number. Increment or decrement the fret mark using Alt+Shift+↑ or Alt+Shift+↓ .

In Normal mode

To edit an existing fret mark in Normal mode:

1. Select one or more fret marks.

2. Use any of the following commands: To increment or decrement, without changing the string: Press ↑ / ↓ . To increment or decrement, changing strings, when possible, to minimize the fret number: PressAlt+Shift+↑ / ↓ To move to an adjacent string (if the string is free and can produce that note): PressCtrl+↑ / ↓ (Mac: Cmd+↑ / ↓ ). Alternatively, use the mouse to drag the fret mark up or down to an adjacent string.

Note: The fret mark cannot be higher than the "Number of frets" value set in theEdit String Data dialog.

Sound and playback

MuseScore has "Sound and playback" capabilities built-in. This chapter covers the playback controls and ways to extendthe instrument sounds.

Mid-staff instrument changes

When a musician is required to double on a different instrument for a section of a piece, the instruction to switchinstruments is generally placed above the staff at the beginning of that section. A return to the primary instrument ishandled in the same manner.

MuseScore enables users to insert a special class of text calledChange Instrument text for this purpose. This class oftext is different from either Staff or System text in that it links the text to the playback and changes the sound to the newinstrument.

Effect of instrument change

116When an instrument change is made:

The sound played will be changed to that of the new instrument from that point onward, but themixer display remains unchanged. Subsequent notes are automatically adjusted to indicate the correctwritten pitch for the new instrument (but the new key signature still needs to be added manually—see below). The new instrument name will be displayed in front of the following systems.

Add an instrument change

1. Select the start point of the change by clicking on a note or rest;

2. Open the main palette by typing F9 (or from the View menu), and click on Text to open the text sub-palette:

3. Double-click on Change Instr;

4. The words "Change Instr." will appear above the anchor note or rest; 5. Double-click the text, then type Ctrl+A to select all of it; 6. Type the actual text you wish to be displayed, and exit text edit mode; 7. Right-click the text and choose "Change Instrument…":

8. Choose the instrument, then click OK:

; 9. Insert a new key signature, if required, at the change, for the staff in question.

Note: Mid-staff instrument changes are limited to thesame type of staff. For example, you cannot change between apercussion staff and a pitched instrument staff or vice versa.

The Mixer allows you to change instrument sounds, adjust volume and panning, and make other adjustments to theplayback for each staff.

Opening the Mixer

To display/hide the mixer, use one of the following:

Press F10 (Mac: fn+F10).

From the main menu, select View→Mixer.

The Mixer is split into a Details Area on the top and a Track Area below.

Track Area

The track area is at the bottom and displays the Master Gain as well as a row of tracks.

Master Gain

The Master Gain controls the overall output volume. To adjust it, click and drag the slider handle or enter a value in thebox underneath.

Track Area

The Track Area displays allows you to adjust the volume of the instruments used by your staves.

MuseScore creates one "part track" for each staff in your score. These part tracks can be further subdivided into "channeltracks" corresponding to the different sounds used within the staff. While many staves only need a single channel track,others require multiple channels so that the instrument can play more than one sound (e.g. a violin which can play in arco,

118tremolo or pizzicato voices); or because of a Mid-staff instrument change. These extra channel tracks can be shown orhidden by clicking the arrow button on top of the track control.

Expanded part track, showing the child tracks in pink.

Channel display arrow

Every part track has a button on the top with an arrow on it, enabled, when that instrument has multiple channels, likee.g. violin (for arco, pizzicato, tremolo), disabled otherwise. When clicked, this will toggle whether the channel tracks of thestaff are displayed next to it. Channel tracks do not have an arrow button. Instead, the name of the track they are a partof is displayed.

Mute and Solo

At the top of each track is a green solo button and a red mute button: each can be toggled on or off. If any Solo button ischecked then only tracks that have solo lit will play. If no solo is lit, all parts can potentially play. Mute does the opposite:any track that has mute lit will not play. By using a combination of mute and solo buttons, you can control whichinstruments are heard during playback.

Pan

The dial below the mute button controls panning left and right. You can click and drag on the dial to change the pan value.Note: MuseScore does not yet support pan values for the part track, so the part track displays the pan value of the firstchannel instead. Setting the pan value of the part track will automatically set all of its children to the same value as well.

Volume

The slider in the middle of the track controls the playback volume.Note: MuseScore does not yet support volume valuesfor the part track, so the part track displays the volume value of the first channel instead. Setting the volume value of thepart track will automatically set all of its children to the same value as well.

Track name

The text box at the bottom of the track contains the current name of the track's part or channel.

Detail Area

The details area displays and provides finer control of the currently selected track.

119Name

The name of the part this track is associated with. Both part tracks and channel tracks display the part name. Note: Thepart name is editable, but this only have effect for the Mixer. The cannel name is no editable.

Track Color

This is a color the user can choose to help distinguish a particular part. Double clicking on this swatch will allow you tochoose a different color for displaying the name of this track. Setting the color of a part track will automatically change thecolors of all its child tracks.

Channel

If a channel track is selected, the channel name is displayed here.

Drumset

Indicates if this part represents a melodic instrument or a drumkit. For regular melodic instruments, each pitch in the samepatch usually has the same timbre, while drumkit patches usually have different timbres for each pitch.

Patch

This is the actual Sound from the soundfont that is used to render your instrument.

Volume

The overall loudness with which the sound is played.

Pan

The panning applied to the part.

Port and Channel

The output MIDI port and channel the part is played on.

Reverb / Chorus

The reverb/chorus value sent to MIDI out. This is information sent to MIDI devices and will not affect MuseScore's built inaudio playback

Mute Voice

This allows you to mute individual voices within each staff. Each row represents a different staff within a part. So pressing'2' on the top row will mute the second voice on the first staff of the part.

Hide Details Button

At the bottom of the detail area is a wide button with a tiny triangle on it. Clicking this button will hide the detail area to giveyou more room. Clicking on it again will restore the detail area.

120Sound

The "Sound" drop-down menu lists every instrument supported by your current SoundFont. If you have multipleSoundFonts loaded in the Synthesizer, all the patches from all the SoundFonts (and/or SFZ files) will appear in a singlelong list—in the order previously set in the Synthesizer.

Tip: To find an instrument, click on the "Sound" list and type the first letter of the instrument name. Repeat as required.

Mid-staff sound change (pizz., con sordino, etc.)

Some instruments come with multiple channels in the Mixer that can be used to change sounds midway through a score.For example, a staff for a stringed instrument (violin, viola, cello etc.) is allocated three channels: one for "arco" (or"normal"), another for "pizzicato" and another for "tremolo." A trumpet staff will have one channel for "normal" and anotherreserved for "mute," and so on.

The following instructions use pizzicato strings as an example, but the same principle can be applied to any otherinstrument staff that allows sound changes.

1. Select the first note of the section you want to be pizzicato;

2. From the main menu, choose Add→Text→Staff Text; 3. Type "pizz." This text is for visual reference only and does not affect playback; 4. Right-click on the applied staff text and select Staff Text Properties… ; 5. In the "Change Channel" tab of the "Staff Text Properties" dialog, select one or more voices on the left;

6. From the dropdown menu, select pizzicato ;

7. Click OK to return to the score.

Every note after the staff text you added now sounds pizzicato. To return to a normal strings sound later in the piece,follow the same guidelines as above except type "arco" in step 3 and select arco in step 6.

Piano Roll Editor

The Piano Roll Editor allows you edit individual notes and tweak aspects of their playback.

Opening the Piano Roll Editor

To open the Piano Roll Editor (PRE), right click on a measure in the score and choose the Piano Roll Editor option fromthe context menu. The Piano Roll Editor will open showing the staff and measure where you clicked. If the Piano Roll

121Editor is already open, it will be updated to show the new staff and measure you clicked on.

Overview

The Piano Roll Editor is divided into several sections. At the very top is a row of buttons and controls that affectplaybackand can modify notes. The name of the part being edited is at the top right.

The central portion contains the Note Display Area which allows you to view and edit notes. Each note is displayed as ablock, with yellow blocks representing selected notes, and darker green blocks representing unselected notes (thesecolors can be changes in the Preferences). Given sufficient space, each block will display its pitch on the left and the voiceit is assigned to on the right. Changing the size of the note blocks is covered in the navigation section.

To the left of the Note Display Area is theKeyboard. By clicking on a key in the Keyboard, you can hear a sample of thatnote playing. As you move the mouse in either the Node Display Area or the Keyboard, a key on the keyboard will light tocorresponding to the pitch you are over. You can also hover your mouse over a particular key to get more informationabout that pitch. If you are using a Drumkit, the keys of the keyboard will show the name of the drum assigned to thatparticular pitch. For instruments that are not concert C, the keyboard will be adjusted so that the C of the keyboardmatches the C of the instrument.

122Along the top of the Note Display Area is theMeasure Ruler which displays the current position of the playback head, aswell as the current looping range if it set.

The bottom of the editor contains the Levels Display Area. It is a bar graph showing extra data values assigned to eachnote, such as its velocity or cutoff time. To the left of the Levels Display Area is a dropdown menu allowing you to selectthe type of data you wish to see displayed or edited.

Navigation

There are several ways to move about in the Piano Roll Editor. First of all, you can click and drag on the scroll bars on theedges of the Note Display Area.

The mouse wheel can also be used to pan and zoom as follows:

Scroll vertically: Mouse wheel.

To jump to a particular measure, switch back to score view and find the measure you wish to see. Then right click on themeasure and select Piano Roll Editor. The Piano Roll Editor will scroll to center on the measure you clicked.

Selecting Notes

In the Note Display Area, you can click on single notes or click and drag to select a group of notes. Holding down themodifier keys will affect how your selection changes:

Shift: Invert existing selection: i.e. notes that were previously selected are deselected, and notes which were not selected are selected. Useful for toggling a note between selected and not selected. Ctrl: Add notes to selection. Ctrl+Shift: Subtract notes from selection.

Editing Notes

To change the pitch of a selection of notes: Drag a selected note up or down to a new pitch; or press the↑ or ↓ arrows.Note: Dragging the note horizontally to change the start time is not supported at the moment.

To delete a selection of notes: Press the Del key.

To move a note selection to another voice: Click the desired voice number button at the top of the editor.

To add notes:

Notes can be inserted by clicking in the Piano Note Area with the modifier keys held. These edit operations will use thebeat or subbeat line to the left of the spot where you click as the point where a note is altered:

Ctrl: A note of the current insert note duration will be added at the subbeat and pitch where you clicked. The note

123 insert length is the same as the one you use to add notes in note entry mode in the score. If you wish to change the duration, you will need to select this in the Score View as the Piano Roll Editor does not currently have these buttons. If notes already exist in this location, a chunk will be cut out of them to make room for the note you are inserting, unless they happen to have the same start time and duration of the note you're adding, in which case the new note will simply be appended to the existing chord. Tuplets are currently not supported, and so will be ignored.

Shift: Looks for a chord that already spans this subbeat line. If it finds one, appends a new pitch to the existing chord. Otherwise, this is a rest and the rest will be replaced with a note of equal start time and duration to the existing rest.

Ctrl+Shift: Looks for a chord or rest that spans this subbeat. This chord will be cut in two at this subbeat line. Tuplets are currently not supported, and so will be ignored.

To edit note event data:

Note event data can be changed in the Levels Display Area. To edit event data such as velocity or cutoff time, first selectthe notes you wish to edit in the note area. Then click in the Levels Display Area on the corresponding bar; the value ofthe level will changed to correspond to the point where you clicked. You can also click and drag in this area to change thelevels of several notes with a single gesture. If you want the levels to all be set to the same value, hold Shift whiledragging. Only selected notes will have their value changed - this is to prevent you from accidentally changing the valuesof other notes.

The Levels area can display the same data in multiple ways. For example, velocity data can be displayed both asabsolute (i.e., relative to the output midi volume) and relative (i.e., as an offset to the dynamics value). You can switchbetween these display modes as you see fit.

124 If set, the window will automatically scroll to center on the playback head during playback.Metronome Toggle metronome.Wave Currently does nothing.Voice Numbers Moves selected notes to chosen voice.Part Name of part currently being viewed/edited.

Second Row

Cursor Provides feedback on the current measure and pitch of the position of the mouse within the Note Display Area.Subdiv

Subdivides the beat by adding extra divisions to the Note Display Area. The value indicated the number of time the beat will be subdivided. So for 4/4 time, a division of 2 will draw grid lines at every eighth note; a division of 3 at every sixteenth note, and so on. Setting the subdivision is necessary for some editing operations if you wish to place notes off the beat.

For larger numbers of subdivisions, you may need to be zoomed in to see the extra grid lines since grid lines are not drawn below a certain density. Combines with the tuplet control which also affects grid line placement.

Tuplet

Adds additional grid lines, subdividing the beat to show the rhythmic placement of tuplets. For example, setting tuplets to 3 will show the beat subdivided into three parts. Combines with the subdiv control to show subdivisions of the tuplet. For example, setting tuplets to 3 and subdiv to 2 will draw grid lines showing the tuplet beats subdivided into two parts - i.e., the beat will be subdivided into 6.

Selecting a tuplet mode other than 1 will disable some of the note insertion tools for the Piano Roll Editor. For larger numbers of subdivisions, you may need to be zoomed in to see the extra grid lines since grid lines are not drawn below a certain density.

Stripe pattern Changes the pattern of stripes shown behind the notes in the Note Display Area. By default the pitches of C major are highlighted, but you can change this to highlight the pitches of a different key, or even scales such as the diminished or whole tone.Velocity

Shows the velocity of the currently selected note (only one note may be selected). Indicates the loudness of the note. This can be expressed as 'Offset' or 'User':

125 Offset: Value is treated as a multiplier for the velocity already set by the dynamics. User: This is the raw value being sent to MIDI and overrides the dynamics value. Values are between 0 and 127, where 64 is "middle, neither loud nor soft".

When you switch from User to Offset or vice versa, the value will be recalculated to best match the value in the other system. This way you could, for example, switch to User mode to set the value as you would like it to sound in MIDI output and then switch to Offset so that this value respects the dynamic marking instead of overriding it. At the moment you switch back, the offset value will be recalculated to match the User value in loudness but will no longer act as an override so you may later change the dynamic.

Pitch Shows the pitch and octave of the selected note in text format (i.e. f#4). The pitch will chance if the note is dragged Up or down to a new pitch. Currently cannot be edited.OnTime Shifts the start of the note in time, which can be used to modify the playing style. Negative values will make the note sound earlier, positive will make it sound later. The duration of the note corresponds to a value of 1000 (e.g. setting the value to 250 will make the note sound 1/4 of its duration later).Length Set the time that the note is sounding, which may be used to modify the degree of "legato". Lower values will make the note sound more staccato, higher values will make it sound more legato. The duration of the note corresponds to a length of 1000, but the value can be set higher. 950 is usually considered "non-legato".

Keyboard

Some keys are hooked up to perform special actions:

↑:Move selected notes up one semitone

The Piano Roll Editor will display in both normal mode and dark mode. If you wish to change the colors the Piano RollEditor uses to display in these modes, they can be adjusted in the Preferences under the Advanced tab. All the Piano RollEditor related properties begin with ui/pianoroll/light for light mode and ui/pianoroll/dark for dark mode.

Play mode

Playback toolbar

Basic playback functions are accessed from the Play toolbar located above the document window:

From left to right, the icons are:

Toggle 'Midi input':

Rewind to start position: Playback returns to the beginning of the score, or to the start of the loop (if one is set). Start or stop playback: See Start/stop playback. Toggle loop playback: See Loop playback. Play repeats: Turn off if you want playback to ignore repeats. Pan score during playback: Turn off if you want the score to remain stationary. Play metronome: Toggles metronome ON and OFF.

Playback commands

Start/stop playback

To start playback:

1. Click on a note, rest or the blank part of a measure to establish the starting point.Note: If no selection is made,

126 playback returns to the place it left off; or, if no previous playback, to the start of the score. 2. Press the Play button; or press Space.

During playback you can jump to a specific note or rest in the score by simply clicking on it.

To stop playback:

Press the Play button; or press Space.

During playback

Once playback has started, the following commands are available:

Go back to previous chord: ←

Advance to next chord: → Go back to start of previous measure: Ctrl+← (Mac: Cmd+←) Advance to start of next measure: Ctrl+→ (Mac: Cmd+→) Rewind to start of score: Home (Mac: ⌘+Home); or press the Rewind button (playback toolbar).

During playback you can still use keyboard shortcuts to open and close panels, such as Play, Synthesizer, Mixer etc.

Loop playback

Playback should be off, and the "Loop playback button" on.

Select the desired region of the score for loop playback. Press the playback button.

Playback will now cycle within the region marked by the blue flags.

Use the "Loop playback" button to toggle the loop on or off.

See also: Play Panel (below).

Play panel

To open the Play Panel use one of the following options:

Press F11 (Mac: Fn+F11).

From the menu bar, select View → Play Panel.

The Play Panel allows you to make temporary changes to tempo and volume, to loop playback between specified pointsetc.

Loop playback: Select a start note and click on theLoop in button; select an end note and click on the Loop out button. Press Play to hear the loop. The controls also work during playback. Rewind, Play: Playback controls. Metronome: Toggle metronome playback ON or OFF. Count in: (Conductor icon) Adds a count-in when you start playback at the start of a measure. Extra beats are added if you start mid-measure. Toggles ON and OFF. Tempo: Make temporary change to tempo. This is displayed as a percentage and as a bpm (beats per minute). Double-click to reset. (Note: Permanent changes to tempo should be made using tempo text) Volume: Make temporary change to volume (resets when program is reopened). Note: To change the default

127 playback volume of the score, see Synthesizer.

SoundFonts and SFZ files

Audio playback is provided by MuseScore's onboard synthesizer, which houses a large selection of virtual (or software)instruments—including percussion and sound effects.

MuseScore supports virtual instruments in two formats:

SoundFont (.sf2/.sf3): A single file containing one or more virtual instruments.

SFZ (.sfz): A set of audio and definition files containing one or more virtual instruments.

SoundFonts

MuseScore comes with its own GM (General MIDI ) SoundFont, MuseScore_General.sf3, containing over 128instruments, sound effects and various drum/percussion kits.

GM (General MIDI) is a universal format, so once your score is set up for correct playback using MuseScore's nativeSoundfont, you should be able to export it in a format of your choice and have it play back on any other user's computer.

Many different Soundfonts are available on the Internet: some free, some commercial. For a list of free soundfonts, seebelow.

Install a SoundFont

After finding and decompressing a SoundFont (see →below), double-click to open it. In most cases, the SoundFont filetype will already be associated with MuseScore, and MuseScore will start and a dialog will appear asking if you want toinstall the SoundFont. Occasionally an application other than MuseScore will be associated with the SoundFont file type; ifthis is the case, you will need to right-click or control-click on the file, so as to display a menu from which you can chooseto open the file in MuseScore. In either case, when the dialog appears asking if you want to install the SoundFont, click"Yes" to place a copy of the SoundFont file in MuseScore's SoundFonts directory. This directory can be viewed orchanged in MuseScore's Preferences, but the default location is:

Windows: %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Soundfonts

macOS and Linux: ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Soundfonts

In contrast to user-added SoundFonts, the initial default SoundFont installed with MuseScore is located in a systemdirectory, meant only for that purpose, which should not be modified. This directory and its default SoundFont file is:

To uninstall a SoundFont, simply open the folder where its file is installed and delete it.

SFZ

An SFZ is a collection of files and directories, an SFZ file and a bunch of actual sound files in WAV or FLAC format, withthe SFZ file being a text file that basically describes what sound file is located where and to be used for what instrumentand pitch range.

Install an SFZ

After downloading an SFZ (see →below), you need to manually extract all the files that belong to the SFZ (the SFZ fileitself and all the subdirectories) into the directory listed above. Leave the subdirectories and their contents as they are.

Uninstall

128To uninstall an SFZ, simply open the folder where its files are installed (seeabove) and delete them all.

Synthesizer

The Synthesizer is MuseScore's central control panel for sound output. Once a SoundFont has beeninstalled, it needs tobe loaded into the Synthesizer in order for MuseScore to use it for playback. To make a different SoundFont the default,load it in the Synthesizer and click Set as Default.

To display the Synthesizer, go to View → Synthesizer. For more details, see Synthesizer.

List of downloadable soundfonts

GM SoundFonts

The following sound libraries conform to the General MIDI (GM2) standard. This specification gives you a sound set of128 virtual instruments, plus percussion kits.

Unzipping downloaded soundfonts

Since soundfonts are large, they are often zipped (compressed) into a variety of formats, including .zip, .sfArk, and .tar.gz.You need to unzip (decompress) these files before they can be used.

ZIP is standard compression format supported by most operating systems.

sfArk is a compression format designed especially for compressing SoundFont files. To decompress it, use Polyphone (cross-platform software); or this online service: https://cloudconvert.com/sfark-to-sf2

.tar.gz is a popular compression format for Linux. Windows users can use7-Zip ; Mac users can use The Unarchiver , or macOS' built-in Archive Utility. Note that if using 7-Zip, you will need to apply decompression twice —once for GZip and once for TAR.

Troubleshooting

If the toolbar play panel is greyed out, or not visible, follow the instructions below to get your sound working again:

1. Right-click on the menu bar and make sure there is a check mark next to thePlayback Controls menu item. If this step does not solve your problem, go to Step 2. 2. If the play panel disappears after changing the SoundFont, go toEdit → Preferences... → I/O tab and click OK without making any changes. After restarting MuseScore, the play panel should reappear.

If you are setting up a SoundFont for the first time, please use one of the recommended SoundFonts listed above.

If playback stutters, then your computer may not be able to handle the SoundFont being used. The following advice mayhelp:

Reduce the amount of RAM (memory) used by MuseScore by using a smaller SoundFont. See thelist above for suggestions. Increase the amount of RAM available for MuseScore by quitting all applications except MuseScore. If you still have problems and a large SoundFont is important to you, consider more RAM for your computer.

See also

Synthesizer Mixer

External links

How to change the SoundFont or add another

The SFZ Format (for details about the sfz specification)

130Swing

MuseScore's swing feature allows you to change the playback of your score from a straight to a swing rhythm. Swing canbe applied globally or only to a section of the score, and is fully variable.

Apply swing to a score section

1. Click on the note where you want swing to start;

2. Double-click Swing in the Text palette; 3. Edit the Swing text as required; 4. If you need to vary swing from the default setting, right click the Swing text and selectSystem text properties... Click on the "Swing Settings" tab and adjust note duration and "Swing ratio" as required.

Swing text can be edited and formatted just like any other text object.

Triplet in tempo marking

Often this notation is used to indicate swing:

MuseScore does not have a way to include a triplet in text as a tempo marking, but there is an easy workaround:

1. Add Swing text as described above and make it invisible (shortcut V, or untick "Visible" in theInspector); 2. Add an appropriate Image of the required tempo marking to the score. These can be downloaded from the bottom of the "How To" page: How to create a visual swing marking . 3. Resize and reposition the image as required.

Return to straight rhythm

If you want playback to return to straight time after a swing section:

1. Add Swing text to the first note or rest of the "straight" section (see above). 2. Edit the text to indicate a return to straight time: e.g. "Straight." 3. Right-click on the text and select System Text Properties…. Click on the "Swing Settings" tab and set "Swing to "Off."

Apply swing globally

If you wish to apply swing to the whole score, you can do so from the menu:

1. Select Format → Style... → Score.

2. In the "Swing Settings" section, set the desired note value and "swing ratio."

External links

How to create a visual swing marking .

Swing (jazz performance style) (Wikipedia)

upload Allegato Dimensioneswing_markings.png 7.81 KB

Synthesizer

Overview

To display the Synthesizer: from the menu, select View→Synthesizer.

The Synthesizer controls MuseScore's sound output and allows you to:

Load and organize different sound sample libraries to play back the music.

131 Apply effects such as reverb and compression. Adjust overall tuning. Alter the output volume. Select Midi Continuous Controllers to use with Single Note Dynamics (versions 3.1 and above).

The Synthesizer window is divided into the following sections/tabs:

Zerberus: A software synthesizer that plays SFZ format sample libraries. Master Effects: Used to apply multi-effects to the score. Tuning: Used to adjust overall playback tuning. Dynamics (versions 3.1 and above): Used to configure Single Note Dynamics Midi controllers.

Save/Load Synthesizer settings

The buttons at the bottom of the Synthesizer window have the following functions:

Button FunctionSet as Saves all current synthesizer settings as the default settings. These are automatically applied to theDefault Synthesizer when you open MuseScore.Load Default Loads the last saved default settings to the Synthesizer.Save to Saves all current synthesizer settings to the current score only.ScoreLoad from Loads the settings from the current score to the synthesizer.Score

Notes: (1) "Synthesizer settings" include the order of SoundFonts and SFZ files, effects set-up, master tuning and volume.(2) Only one set of Synthesizer settings can be in effect at a time—i.e. if multiple scores are open at once, it is notpossible to make changes to the Synthesizer in one score and leave other scores' settings untouched. (3) Changes tosynthesizer settings will not be heard in exported audio files unless saved to the score first (see table, above). See alsoTuning (below).

Fluid

Click on the Fluid tab to access the control panel for SF2/SF3SoundFont sample libraries. By default, the SoundFontMuseScore_General.sf3 should already be loaded.

You can load, rearrange and delete soundfonts as required. Playback can be shared between any combination of differentsoundfonts (and/or SFZ files). The order of soundfonts in Fluid is reflected in the default order of instruments in the mixer.

To load a soundfont

132 1. Click on the Add button 2. Click on a soundfont in the list.

To be able to load the soundfont, it first needs to beinstalled in your Soundfonts folder. This will ensure that it appears inthe list in step 2 (above).

To reorder the soundfonts

1. Click on a soundfont 2. Use the up/down arrows (on the right-hand side) to adjust the order. 3. Repeat with other soundfonts in the list if required.

The order of virtual instrument sets in the Synthesizer is reflected in the order of instruments listed in theMixer. So, ifplayback of a score depends on a mix of instrument sets, it is advisable to save the Synthesizer configuration to the scorein question by pressing the Save to Score button. When you next wish to play back the score, press theLoad from Score toload the same configuration. However, remember this only sets the order of instruments—not the instruments themselves,which should be in place on your computer.

To remove a soundfont

1. Click on the name of the soundfont

2. Click on the Delete button.

This removes the soundfont from the synthesizer but does notuninstall it from the Soundfonts folder: it will still beavailable if you wish to reload it later.

Zerberus

Click on the Zerberus tab to access the control panel for SFZ sound sample libraries. You can add, delete or reorder filesin a similar way to the Fluid tab. Note that, as with Fluid, the SFZ files must first beinstalled in your soundfonts folderbefore they can be loaded into the synthesizer.

Volume

The slider on the right of the Synthesizer controls the playback volume: any changes made here last only to the end of thesession, unless saved to the score or set as the new default.

Effects

The Master Effects tab of the Synthesizer allows you to addreverb and compression to your score.

Master Effects with Zita1 Reverb and SC4 Compressor.

To turn an effect on or off:

133 Select an option from the drop-down list next toEffect A or Effect B (the effects are applied in series, A → B).

To store and load effects configurations, use the buttons at the bottom of the Synthesizer window. SeeSynthesizersettings (above) for details.

Zita 1 reverb

The Zita 1 stereo reverb module allows you to simulate the ambience of anything from a small room to a large hall. Thepre-delay, reverb time and tone of the reverb can be finely tuned using the controls provided:

Delay: Set a pre-delay for the reverb from 20-100 ms.

Low RT60 (Low frequency reverb time): Use the grey control to adjust the center frequency (50–1000 Hz) of the low frequency band which you want to affect: the green control adjusts the reverb time (1–8 secs) of this frequency band. Mid RT60 (Mid-range reverb time): Adjust the reverb time (1–8 secs) of the mid-range frequency band. HF Damping: Adjusts the high frequency component of the reverb. Increasing this value increases the frequency of the cut-off point and makes the reverb appear brighter and longer. EQ1: Allows you to cut or boost (-15 to +15) a frequency band (center = 40 Hz - 2 KHz) in thelower part of the spectrum. EQ2: Allows you to cut or boost (-15 to +15) a frequency band (center = 160 Hz - 10 KHz) in thehigher part of the spectrum. Output: Controls the amount of effect applied. "Dry" is no effect. "Wet" indicates 100% reverb. "Mix" is a 50/50 balance of wet/dry signal.

Note: EQ1 and EQ2 affect the tone of the reverb only,not the dry (unprocessed) signal.

To quickly set up an effects patch, set "Output" to "Mix" and adjust the "Mid RT60" control to the desired reverb time.Then fine tune the effect as explained above.

SC4 compressor

The SC4 stereo compressor gives you fine control over the playback's dynamic range, reducing the volume variationbetween loud and soft sounds. It offers the following controls:

RMS: Adjusts the balance between RMS (0) and Peak (1) compression. In the former, the compressor responds to averaged-out levels in the signal; in Peak mode, the compressor responds to peak levels. Attack: (1.5–400 ms) The length of time it takes for compression to engage fully after the signal exceeds the threshold level. Release: (2–800 ms) The time it takes for compression to return to zero after the signal falls below the threshold level. Threshold: (in dB) The signal level above which compression starts to take effect. Lowering the threshold increases the amount of signal that is compressed. Ratio: The amount of compression applied to the signal above the threshold. The higher the ratio, the greater the compression. Varies between 1:1 and 20:1. Knee: Allows you to select a range between "soft knee" and "hard knee". The softer the knee, the more gradual the transition between uncompressed and compressed signal. Gain: Compression tends to lower the volume, so use this control to boost the signal as required.

The Tuning tab is where you can adjust the program's master tuning. For Concert Pitch instruments, A4 = 440 Hz bydefault.

134To change the Master tuning:

Enter a new value in the Master tuning field, then press Change Tuning.

Notes: (1) This tuning applies to all scores in thecurrent session only. To make this the program default or to store it to aparticular score, see Save/Load Synthesizer settings. (2) To apply the new tuning to exported audio files (WAV, MP3,OGG), press Save to Score before exporting.

Dynamics (versions 3.1 and above)

Click on the Dynamics tab to access the control panel for Single Note Dynamics:

In the Advanced Settings box, you can choose to enable or disable the Expression Controller for Instruments Sound:

Switch all patches: Select 1) To Expressive (to enable for all instruments sounds), 2) To Non-Expressive (to disable for all instruments sounds), 3) Reset All (Reset all instruments sounds to defaults)

See also

135 SoundFont Mixer

Tempo

Tempo markings can be found in the Tempo palette of the Basic and Advanced workspaces. They are supplied asmetronome marks, but can be subsequently edited to display any tempo or expression you want. Playback tempo can bevaried throughout the score by using multiple tempo markings, visible or invisible.

Add a tempo marking

Use any of the following methods:

Select a note or rest and press the keyboard shortcut Alt+Shift+T.

Select a note or rest, and from themenu bar chose Add→Text...→Tempo Marking. Select a note or rest and double-click an appropriate metronome mark in theTempo palette; Drag-and-drop a metronome mark from the Tempo palette directly onto a note or rest.

Note: If a tempo marking is applied from the menu or using a keyboard shortcut, the beat note automatically follows thetime signature. The advantage of applying from a palette is that you can chose which beat note to use.

To change the tempo of an existing metronome mark in the score:

1. Enter Edit mode for the tempo mark in question;

You can also override the tempo of an existing metronome mark from theInspector:

1. Select the tempo mark;

2. Untick "Follow text" in the Tempo text section of the Inspector;

3. Set the desired playback tempo in the "Tempo" field underneath.

Note: Playback may be faster or slower if the tempo setting in theplay panel is at a percentage other than 100%.

Edit tempo text

Tempo marks can be edited and formatted just like any other text object. To set text properties or text style, seeTextstyles and properties.

The tempo indicated by a metronome mark usually persists even if overwritten by an expression—such as Andante,Moderato etc. You can also add further text to a plain metronome mark. e.g.

Overriding the tempo marking

You can temporarily override the indicated tempo, and play the score back at any tempo you like using theplay panel:

1. Display the play panel: View→Play Panel or F11 (Mac: fn+F11):

136 2. Move the tempo slider up or down as required. The tempo is shown both as an absolute value and as a percentage of the currently indicated tempo mark. Double-click the tempo slider to reset it.

Note: BPM is always measured and displayed in quarter note beats per minute, regardless of the (denominator of the)time signature in effect.

Ritardando and accelerando playback

You can simulate ritardando ("rit.") and accelerando ("accel.") playback by adding hidden tempo markings to the score.The printed indication to the musician should be added as staff/system text in addition.

In the example illustrated below, the tempo was originally 110 BPM (beats per minute). At the ritardando, the tempodecreases by 10 BPM on the first note of each measure. Each tempo change is made invisible by unchecking the Visiblecheckbox in the Inspector, so that only the ritardando shows on the printed score:

A plugin has been developed to automate this process: TempoChanges

Fermatas

Fermatas, available in the Articulations and Ornaments palette, have a Time stretch property that can be set via theInspector. By default, this property is set to 1.00. To have MuseScore play back a fermata for twice its normal duration,click on the fermata and set "Time stretch" to 2.00. This of course does not work for fermatas applied to barlines, asbarlines don't have a duration to stretch.

See also

Play mode Time signature

Dynamics

Dynamics are symbols indicating the relative loudness of a note or phrase of music. They can be found in the Dynamicspalette in either the Basic or Advancedworkspace.

Additional dynamics are available in the Master Palette (Shift+F9).

Note: if you wish to adjust the overall playback volume of the score, use the volume slider in thePlay Panel, or

137Synthesizer.

Add a dynamic

To apply a dynamic to the score, use one of the following methods:

Select a note and double-click a dynamic symbol in a palette.

Drag a dynamic symbol from a palette onto a note.

To create a crescendo or decrescendo, see Hairpin.

Adjust properties

The default dynamic of the score is mf (mezzoforte)—set at MIDI velocity 80 (out of 127). Depending on the dynamicgoverning a particular section of the score, velocity (and the resulting loudness) may be less than or greater than this.

To edit the velocity of a dynamic:

Select the dynamic and, in the Dynamic section of the Inspector edit the Velocity value—higher for louder, lower for softer.

To adjust the range (i.e. the staves in the system affected by the dynamic):

Select the dynamic, and in the Dynamic section of the Inspector, chose an option from "Dynamic range". The default is "Part," which means that all staves for a particular instrument will be affected. "Staff" limits the effect to the staff attached to the dynamic. "System" means that all staves in the system will be affected by the dynamic.

Customize a dynamic

Dynamics can be edited just like any other text object. Special character shortcuts can be used to add the followingsymbols:

You can also edit the velocity and range etc. (seeabove). If desired, you can save the result for future use in acustompalette.

Single Note Dynamics (SND)

Starting in Version 3.1, MuseScore supports single note dynamics. In addition toediting the velocity, you can also edit thevelocity change in the inspector. Entering a number into this field will change the velocity of the note by approximately thatamount after the initial velocity is played. A negative number can be used to lower the volume after the initial note and apositive number will make the note play louder after the initial volume.

External links

Video tutorial: Lesson 10 - Articulations, Dynamics and Text

Dynamics at Wikipedia

Capo playback

MuseScore allows you to transpose the playback of a staff, without affecting the music notation. This simulates the effectof a capo (Wikipedia) on the instrument.

To add a capo:

1. Add staff text to the note/rest from which you want capo playback to start; 2. Right-click on the staff text, select Staff Text Properties... , then click on the Capo Settings tab;

138 3. Check the "Capo Settings" checkbox, and set Capo fret to the fret number you wish to apply the capo at (each fret increases the pitch by a semitone); 4. Click Ok to apply your changes; 5. Edit the wording of the text as desired.

Capo playback will apply from the note that the staff text is attached to, until either the next staff text with "Capo Settings"enabled, or until the end of the score. A Capo fret setting of "No capo" will remove any capo previously set for a staff,returning it to its original tuning.

TextThere are many different kinds of text objects in MuseScore (see tables below); text may also be found incorporated intolines. This chapter shows you how to create, format and edit text objects, and also includes information about thefollowing types of text:

Text type Uses

General purpose text attached to a single staff: appearing only in that instrument Staff text part. System text General purpose text attached to a single staff: appearing in all instrument parts. Chord symbols Display the chords associated with a melody: usually above the staff. Fingering Numbers or letters attached to notes showing which fingers to use. Lyrics Create lyrics attached to a melody. Rehearsal marks Facilitate rehearsals, divide score into sections, bookmark passages etc.

For other types of text available in MuseScore, follow the links below:

To add a text-based element to the score, use one of the following general methods:

Keyboard shortcut: For example, press Ctrl+Tto enter Staff text , Ctrl+L to enter Lyrics, and so on. Menu command: Add→Text allows you to choose from a range of text-based elements. Workspace: Select a note and double-click an icon in one of the palettes; or, alternatively, drag a symbol from a palette onto the staff. E.g. Swing text, Tempo text etc.

Notes: (1) The exact method depends on the type of text you are adding (seeText). (2) For general-purpose text boxesattached to staves, see Staff and system text.

Text formatting

When a text object is created in MuseScore, it assumes the correspondingText Style: all staff text, for example, has aunique Text Style, as have tempo markings, dynamics, chord symbols etc. Each Text Style consists of a number of textproperties (font-face, font-size, font-style etc.), which can be viewed, mainly, in the Text Styles dialog(Format→Style…→Text Styles).

139A newly-created text object starts off with identical text properties to the Text Style. These can be viewed in theInspector:

However, these text properties are not limited to those of the default Text Style: if need be, you can edit them in theInspector independently of Text Style.

Finally, if you want to apply formatting to specific characters in a text object (font-face, font-size, Bold, Italic, Underline,superscript, subscript), you can do so in text edit mode.

When you apply a text element to the score, its anchor position will depend on the type:

Title, Subtitle, Composer, Poet: Anchored to a frame.

Fingering: Anchored to note heads. Lyrics: Anchored to a time position (a note/chord, but not a rest). Chord symbol: Anchored to a time position. Staff text: Anchored to a time position. System text: Anchored to a time position.

Text editing

Enter/exit text edit mode

To enter Text edit mode use one of the following methods:

Double click on a text element.

Right-click on a text element and select Edit element. Click on a text element and press Ctrl+E (Mac: Cmd+E).

140In this mode you can apply formatting to individual characters, including options such asbold, italic, underline, subscript,superscript, font family and font size. These are accessed from the Text toolbar below the document window:

To exit Text edit mode use one of the following:

Press Esc. Click on a part of the score outside the edit window.

Keyboard shortcuts

In Text edit mode, the following keyboard shortcuts are available:

Ctrl+B (Mac: ⌘+B) toggles bold face.

Ctrl+I(Mac: ⌘+I) toggles italic. Ctrl+U (Mac: ⌘+U) toggles underline. Home End ← → ↑ ↓ moves cursor. Backspace (Mac: Delete ) removes character to the left of the cursor. Del (Mac: → Delete or fn+Delete ) removes character to the right of the cursor. ↵ starts new line. F2 (Mac: fn+F2) Inserts special characters (see below).

Symbols and special characters

You can use the Special Characters window to insert quarter notes, fractions, and many other kinds of special symbolsor characters into your text. A few symbols can also be accessed by shortcut (see below).

To open Special Characters, use any of the following methods:

Click on the icon in the text toolbar (below the score window). Press F2 (Mac: fn+F2).

Note: (1) This only works in Text edit mode; (2) The Special Characters dialog should not be confused with the menu itemof the same name in the macOS version of MuseScore.

The dialog is divided into 3 tabs: Common symbols, musical symbols and unicode symbols. The musical and unicode tabsare further subdivided into alphabetically-arranged categories.

Double-clicking an item in the Special Characters dialog immediately adds it to the text where the cursor is positioned.Multiple items can be applied without closing the dialog box, and the user can even continue to type normally, deletecharacters, enter numerical character codes etc., with it open.

Special character shortcuts

141In Text edit mode the following keyboard shortcuts can be used to access certain special characters:

Text styles and properties

A Text Style applies to all text objects in the score of a particular type. Staff text objects, for example, have a uniquestyle, as do all tempo markings, all lyrics, all chord symbols and so on.

You can view and edit all text styles by selecting Format→Style…→Text Styles. This gives you access to the followingtextproperties for each style:

Name: Change the name of a user style if desired.

Font face / Font size / Font style: The name of the font (e.g. Times New Roman, Arial etc.), its size in points, and any optional Italic, Bold or Underline formatting. Align: Horizontal (left, right, center) and Vertical. Offset X/Y: Horizontal and vertical offsets in sp. units. Size changes with staff space setting: Whether text size changes in proportion toscore scaling. Frame: Chose to have a circular or square frame around the text. Foreground color: of the frame border. Background color: of the background within the frame. Border: Thickness of the line of the frame in space units. Text margin: Inner frame margin in space units.

142 Border radius: For box frame, radius of rounded corner.

Notes: (1) Opacity is set by the parameter "Alpha channel" in the "Select Color" dialog: a value between 0, transparent, and 255, opaque. (2) Other text properties, such as font color, can be set in the Inspector.

You can also edit the text properties of aText Style by selecting an object of the desired style in the score, adjusting itsproperties in the Inspector, and clicking the Set as style buttons as you go. This will automatically update theText Styleand all relevant text objects in the score.

Text objects

If you want to format a particular text object in the score differently to itsText Style, select it and adjust its text propertiesin the Inspector:

If you have made changes to a particular text property in the Inspector, but want to revert that property to theText Styledefinition, press the "Reset to style default" button.

Save and load text styles

Text Styles (together with all other styles in a document) can be saved as astyle file and loaded into other MuseScorefiles. See Save and load style.

See also

Text editing Header/Footer Behavior of applied text and lines

Staff and system text

Staff Text or System Text is invaluable as general purpose text. To apply to the score, use one of the following methods:

Select a note or rest; then for Staff text, press Ctrl+T; or for System text, press Shift+Ctrl+T. Select a note or rest; then select the desired option fromAdd→Text. Select a note or rest, then double click the desired text from a palette. Drag the desired text from a palette onto a note or rest.

This will create an empty bounding box for text entry. Press Esc or click on an empty space outside the box to exit.

Apart from their indicative use, staff and system text also have optional playback properties: see below.

Summary of differences:

Playback (if Appears in Instrument

Text style Applies to? applicable) parts?Staff text Staff only Staff only Staff instrument only All systemSystem Text All system staves All instruments staves

Staff text

143Staff Text is applied to one staff (or Grand staff) in the score, and is indicative only for that staff; any playback effectassociated with the text is limited in the same way. The text will appear in the corresponding instrument part.

If you choose to hide empty staves, any staff text belonging to an empty staff will also be hidden.

Staff text can, for example, be used to apply indications such as Solo or Pizzicato to one staff in a score. Depending onwhat the instructions of the staff text are, MIDI playback of that staff at the text location can be altered to match theinstructions by right-clicking on the staff text and selecting Staff Text Properties… . See Mid-staff sound change.

Staff text properties

To access Change channel, Swing Settings, and Capo Settings:

Right-click on the text and chose "Staff Text properties," then click on the relevant tab.

System text

System text is applied to one staff in the score, but is indicative forevery staff in the system. Any associated playbackproperties are applied to the whole system. The text will appear in all instrument parts.

System text is never hidden by the hide empty staves feature.

System text properties

To add or edit Swing:

Right-click on the text and chose System Text properties, then click on the Swing Settings tab.

When you exit the chord symbol, the characters you have typed will automatically assume the correct format: by default aroot note typed in lower case will turn into upper case (for alternative options, seeAutomatic Capitalization); a "#", "b" or"natural" will turn into a proper sharp (♯), flat (♭) or natural (♮) and so on. Do not try to use actual flat, sharp and natural

Chord symbol syntax

MuseScore understands most of the abbreviations used in chord symbols:

Major: M, Ma, Maj, ma, maj, Δ (type t or ˆ for the triangle)

Minor: m, mi, min, - Diminished: dim, ° (entered with lowercase letter o, shows as ° if using the Jazz style, as o otherwise) Half-diminished: ø (type 0, zero). Alternatively, you can, of course, chose abbreviations such as mi7b5 etc. Augmented: aug, + The following abbreviations are also valid: extensions and alterations like b9 or #5, sus, alt, and no3;inversions and slash chords, such as C7/E; commas; parentheses, which can enclose part, or even all, of a chord symbol.

Edit a chord symbol

An existing chord symbol can be edited in a similar way to ordinary text: SeeText editing.

Transpose chord symbols

Chord symbols are automatically transposed by default if you apply the menuTranspose command to the containingmeasures. If this is not required, you can untick the "Transpose chord symbols" option in the same dialog.

Chord symbol text

To adjust the appearance of all chord symbol text, use any of the following options:

From the main menu, chose Format → Style → Text Styles → Chord Symbol. Then edit the text properties as required. Select a chord symbol and make changes in theInspector, pressing the "Set as style" buttons as you go.

Chord symbol style

To access formatting options for chord symbols:

From the menu, select Format→Style…→Chord Symbols. Adjustable properties are listed under the following headings:

Appearance

Three options are possible: Standard and Jazz and Custom. You can select between these using the radio buttons.

In the Standard style, chords are rendered simply, with the font determined by yourchord symbol text style.

145 In the Jazz style, the MuseJazz font is used for a handwritten look, with distinctive superscript and other formatting characteristics. The Jazz style is selected by default if you use any of the Jazz templates.

The Custom style option allows you to customize the look of chord symbols (and also ensures compatibility with older scores). Select a customized Chord symbols style file in the field below: this can be created by copying and modifying one of the pre-existing files in the "styles" folder. Documentation can be found in the same folder. Note, however, that this is for advanced users only, and there is no guarantee these files will be supported in the future.

Note spelling

By default, MuseScore uses letter names for chord symbols. For users in regions where other note naming schemes areused, MuseScore provides the following controls:

Standard: A, B♭, B, C, C♯,...

By default, MuseScore automatically capitalizes all note names on exit, regardless of whether you entered them in upperor lower case. However, you can also choose other automatic capitalization options:

Lower case minor chords: c, cm, cm7,...

Lower case bass notes: C/e,... All caps note names: DO, RE, MI,...

You can also turn off the automatic capitalization completely, in which case note names are simply rendered the way youtype them.

Positioning

Distance to fretboard diagram: If a fretboard diagram is present, this value is the height at which the chord symbol is applied above the diagram (negative values can be used). Minimum chord spacing: The space to leave between chord symbols. Maximum barline distance: Changes the size of the gap between the last chord symbol in the measure and the following barline. You only need to adjust this value if there is a continuous problem in the score with overlap between the last symbol in one measure and the first symbol in the next.

Note: In addition to the settings described here, the default position of applied chord symbols is also determined bysettings in the Text Styles dialog. The effect is cumulative.

Capo

Enter the number of the capo position at which you want to display substitute chords, in brackets, after all chord symbolsin the score.

Fingering

Fingering symbols for various instruments are found in the Fingering palette in the Advanced workspace.

146 Keyboard music employs the numbers 1–5 to represent fingers of the left or right hand. There is also afingering positioner plugin to help you optimize the layout of piano or keyboard fingerings.

Add fingering to a single note

Use any of the following methods:

Select a note and double click one of the fingering symbols in a Palette. Drag and drop a fingering symbol from a palette onto a note

When fingering is added to a note, the focus immediately shifts to the symbol, so you can adjust it right away.

Add fingering to several notes

1. Select the desired notes;

2. Double-click a fingering symbol in a palette.

Easy fingering input mode (version 3.1 and above)

This special feature allows you to add fingering quickly and easily to successive notes.

1. Chose one of the following options:

Add the first fingering symbol using one of the methods shown above: this can be a "Left Hand Guitar Fingering", "Fingering" or "String Number"; For "Fingering" only, select a note and press the keyboard shortcut for "Add fingering" (defined inPreferences: Shortcuts); then type the desired number; 2. Chose one of the following options: To move the cursor to the next note: Press Space, or Alt + →; To move the cursor to the previous note: Shift + Space, or Alt + ←; 3. Type the desired number; 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 as required; 5. Press Esc, or click on an empty space in the document window, to exit.

Adjust position of fingering

Single fingering

To change the position of one symbol, use any of the following methods:

For fine adjustments (0.1 sp) use the arrow keys; For larger adjustments (1 sp) useCtrl+Arrow. Change X and Y offsets in the Inspector . Drag the symbol using your mouse.

To change the position of multiple symbols:

Note: You can also use the fingering positioner plugin mentioned above to optimize the layout of piano fingerings.

To restore a symbol to its default position, select it and press Ctrl+R.

Edit fingering text

Fingering is a form of text symbol and can be edited and styled like any other. Right-clicking on the symbol gives you arange of options.

Lyrics

Enter a lyrics line

First line

1. Enter the notes of the melody line;

2. Select the note where you want to start entering lyrics; 3. To enter lyrics mode, type Ctrl+L (Mac: ⌘+L); or from the main menu, select Add→Text→Lyrics; 4. Type a syllable; 5. Use the following options to continue entering lyrics: Go to the next syllable: Press Space (or Ctrl+→ (Mac: ⌥+→)) at the end of a syllable. Hyphen (to connect syllables): Press - at the end of a syllable. Go to the previous syllable: Press Shift+Space (or Ctrl+← (Mac: ⌥+→)). Move left: Press ← (left arrow). If the cursor is at the beginning of a syllable, it will jump to the previous one. Move right: Press → (right arrow). If the cursor is at the end of a syllable, it will jump to the next one. Move to the syllable below: Press ↓ (down arrow). Move to the syllable above: Press ↑ (up arrow). Start new lyrics line: Press ↵ (Return) at the end of an existing lyrics syllable N ( ote: Don't use the Enter key from the numeric keypad!). 6. To exit lyrics mode, press Esc or click outside of the text box.

Subsequent lines

If you want to add another lyrics line to an existing one (e.g. a 2nd or 3rd verse etc.):

1. Chose one of the following options:

Select the note where you want to start the new lyrics line. Enterlyrics mode as shown in step 3 (above). The cursor moves to a new (blank) line. Enter text edit mode on an existing syllable, go to the end of the syllable and press↵ (Return). The cursor moves to the next line. 2. Continue entering lyrics from step 4 (above).

Example:

Special characters

In most cases, lyrics can be edited just like normal text. However, special keyboard shortcuts are required to enter thefollowing characters:

148 Character space: Ctrl+Space (Mac: ⌥+Space).

- (hyphen): Ctrl+- (Mac: ⌥+-) or AltGr+-.

Line feed: Ctrl+↵ (Mac: ⌥+Return) or Enter (from the numeric keypad).

Verse numbers

To number verses, simply type the number (e.g. 1.) and aspace before the first syllable. MuseScore will automaticallyalign the numbers and first syllable correctly.

Melisma

A melisma is a syllable or word that extends over two or more notes. It is indicated by an underline extending from thebase of a syllable to the last note of the melisma. The underline is created by positioning the cursor at the end of asyllable and pressing Shift+_: once for each note in the melisma. See the image below:

The above lyric was created in the following manner:

1. Type the letters, soul,.

2. At the end of the word, press Shift+___. 3. Type the letters To, then press Esc.

For non-last syllables to extend, just use additional dashes-, usually only one of them will show (more when the distancebetween the syllables is large enough), and the syllable will right-align to the first note, similar to last syllables that gotnotated with a melisma, see above.

Elision (Lyric) slur / Synalepha

Two syllables under a note can be joined with anelision slur, also known as a "lyric slur" or "synalepha". For example:

To create the example lyric text, starting with the syllable text "te":

1. Type te;

2. Click on the keyboard icon in the bottom-left corner of the screen, or pressF2 to open the Special Characters palette;

3. Use one of the following options:

Double-click one of the three elision slurs in the "Common Symbols" tab: "Narrow elision", "Elision", or "Wide elision" (these can be found between the "C Clef" and the "p" dynamic—see image below):

149 Double-click the elision slur found after the 7/8 fraction in the "Common Symbols" tab (next to last character in the image above). Depending on the font, add one or more spaces before/after the slur using Ctrl+Space (Mac: ⌥+Space).

Note: Not all fonts include the "undertie" character (U+203F ‿ "undertie", present in "Special Characters" mainly for compatibility with MuseScore 1.x scores). To find out which fonts on your computer support it, see "fontlist " (look for any font that shows a tie between "te" and "A" instead of a blank rectangle).

To make global adjustments to the properties of all lyrics in the score:

1. From the menu, select Format→Style...→Lyrics;

Adjust position of individual lyrics lines

To adjust the position of a particular lyrics line:

1. Select the lyrics line: i.e. right click on a word in the line, and (from the menu) choseSelect→More...; then check the relevant options, which should include "Same system"; 2. Adjust the X and Y offsets in the Inspector.

Copy lyrics to clipboard

To copy all lyrics to the clipboard:

From the menu bar, select Tools→Copy Lyrics to Clipboard .

Paste lyrics from clipboard

To copy and paste lyrics from a text file (say) into a score:

1. Enter the notes in the score to which the lyrics will be attached. 2. Set up your lyrics in a text file, with appropriate spaces, hyphens, line-breaks etc. 3. Copy the lyrics from the text-file into the clipboard. 4. Select the start note in MuseScore, and pressCtrl+L (Mac: Cmd+L) (step 3 under Enter lyrics in a score). 5. Repeatedly applying paste will enter successive words of the lyrics. You may need to enter melismas and make

150 other corrections as you go along.

See also

Text Chord symbol

External links

How to insert Lyrics

How to move lyrics How to copy lyrics, or lyrics with rhythm How to add a block of text to a score Video tutorial: MuseScore in Minutes: Lesson 6 - Text, Lyrics and Chords

Rehearsal marks

Rehearsal marks can be used in a number of ways:

To identify specific points in a score to facilitate rehearsing.

As bookmarks in the score to which you can instantly navigate—using theFind/Search command. To mark the various sections in the score.

Typically, rehearsal marks consist of one or more letters and/or numbers, and appear in sequence in the score—e.g. A,B, C…, or 1, 2, 3… etc. Alternatively, they may display measure numbers (usually larger than standard measurenumbers, boldface and/or enclosed in boxes). Multi-measure rests are automatically broken before and after rehearsalmarks.

Rehearsal marks can be added to the score (i)automatically—which ensures that they are named in sequence—or (ii)manually, allowing you to name them as you wish.

1. Click on a note (or rest) at the desired location;

Add an alphanumeric rehearsal mark

Use either of the following options:

Click on a note (or rest) at the desired location, then double-click the [B1] rehearsal mark icon in the "Text"palette. Drag and drop the rehearsal mark from the "Text" palette onto the score.

Notes: (1) By default, marks are added in the sequence, A, B, C etc. (2) To change the format of subsequently-addedmarks (to lower case letters, or numbers), edit the previous rehearsal mark accordingly. (3) Marks added between existingrehearsal marks append a number or letter to the previous mark: it is a good idea to apply the Resequence commandafterwards (see below).

Add a measure-number rehearsal mark

1. Add the first rehearsal mark in the series as an alphabetical one; thenedit it to read the same as the number of the measure it is attached to; 2. Add subsequent marks as shown above. They will automatically adopt the measure-number format.

Automatically resequence rehearsal marks

151MuseScore allows the user to automatically re-order a series of rehearsal marks if they have got out of sequence for anyreason. Use the following method:

1. Before making a selection, you can, if desired, establish a new format for the rehearsal marks (lower/upper case, number, or measure number) by manually altering the first mark in the range accordingly. 2. Select the range of measures you wish to apply theResequence command to (if there is no selection then the program assumes you wish to resequence all measures). 3. From the menu, select Tools → Resequence Rehearsal Marks.

MuseScore automatically detects the sequence based on the first rehearsal mark in the selection—all rehearsal marks inthe selection are then altered accordingly. The following sequences are possible:

A, B, C etc. a, b, c etc. Numerical: 1, 2, 3 etc. Numerical: according to measure numbers. This requires the number of the first mark in the series to be equal to the number of the measure it is attached to.

Text style

Rehearsal marks are a variety of system text, appearing both on the score and on everypart. By default, they are in alarge bold font, and enclosed in frames with rounded corners. All aspects of their appearance can be changed globally viathe rehearsal mark Text style.

Search for a rehearsal mark

See Find (Viewing and navigation).

See also

Text properties

External links

Rehearsal Letter (Wikipedia article)

FormattingLayout and formatting

Layout and formatting options for the score are accessed from the Format menu.

Ways to affect layout

This section lists the main commands and dialogs affecting score layout. Other formatting options are covered furtherdown the page (but for text, see Text styles and properties).

Display in concert pitch: Tick this option to display the score atconcert pitch. If unticked the score is displayed at written pitch.

Create multimeasure rests: Tick to display multimeasure rests.

Minimum number of empty measures: The default is 2.

Minimum width of measure: The default width is 4 sp.

Hide empty staves within systems: This option saves space by hiding those staves in a system which consist of only empty measures. Used for condensed scores.

Don't hide empty staves in first system: Always display staves in first system even if they consist of empty measures.

Display note values across measure boundaries: A feature useful for notating early music. See Unbarred notation.

Hide instrument name if there is only one instrument: You don't usually need to display the instrument name in this case.

Swing settings allows you to control the degree of swing for the whole score.

Swing: Choice of OFF (default) / Eight Note / Sixteenth note.

Select swing ratio: The default is 60%.

If you prefer to set swing on the score page, seeSwing.

Page

To open the Page dialog, select Format→Style...→Page.

This dialog allows you to adjust the overall layout of your score by changing the spacing of margins, systems, staves,lyrics lines, and frames. You can also control the display of key signatures, time signatures and clefs.

The diagram below is a guide to various parameters under the control of this dialog:

153 Music top margin: The distance between the top staff line of the first staff on the page and thetop page margin.

Music bottom margin: The distance between the bottom staff line of the last staff on the page and thebottom page margin.

Staff distance: The space between staves which are not part of a grand staff (see below).

Grand staff distance: The space between staves that share the same instrument—such as the piano, organ, or those of a guitar staff/tab pair.

To open the Sizes dialog, select Format→Style...→Sizes.

Sets the proportional size of "small" and grace notes, as well as small staves and clefs. Changing this would be unusual.

Header, Footer

To open the Header, Footer dialog, select Format→Style...→Header, Footer .

This allows you to add header and footer text using meta tags (seeScore information)—such as page numbers, pageheaders, copyright information etc. For example, you can create different Headers and Footers for even and odd pages,such as putting page numbers on the right for odd-numbered pages and on the left for even-numbered pages.

154If you hover with your mouse over the Header or Footer text region, a list of macros will appear, showing their meaning,as well as the existing meta tags and their content.

To create a header or footer for an individual part, that part needs to be the active tab. To create a header or footer for ascore with linked parts, make sure the main score is in the active tab.

Measure Numbers

To open the Measure Numbers dialog, select Format→Style...→Measure Numbers .

This allows you to specify whether measure numbers will appear in the score, and, if so, at what intervals. You can alsoset the font properties.

System

To open the System dialog, select Format→Style...→System.

This dialog allows you to adjust certain properties of all systems.

Brackets:

System bracket thickness: Set the width of system brackets.

Brace thickness: Set the width of system braces. System bracket distance: Set the distance between system brackets and the start barlines. Brace distance: Set the distance between system braces and the start barlines.

See also Brackets.

Dividers:

Left / Right: Specify whether to show system dividers, what types, and apply global positioning offset values.

Instrument names:

Long Instrument Names: Specify the font characteristics and alignment.

Short Instrument Names: Specify the font characteristics and alignment.

Clefs

To open the Clefs dialog, select Format→Style...→Clefs.

Chose the style of the default tablature clef:Standard or Serif.

Accidentals

To open the Accidentals dialog, select Format→Style...→Accidentals.

Allows you to specify how the score displays key signature accidentals at key changes. SeeNaturals on key signaturechanges.

Measure

To open the Measure dialog, select Format→Style...→Measure .

For details, see Measure.

Barlines

To open the Barlines dialog, select Format→Style...→Barlines.

Show repeat barline tips ("winged repeats):

Barline at start of single staff: Whether to show barlines at the beginning of a staff. Barline at start of multiple staff: Whether to show barlines at the beginning of multiple staves. Scale barlines to staff size: Affects "small" staves only.

Other properties allow you to set the thickness of "thin," "thick" and double barlines, the distance between double barlines,

155and the repeat barline to dot distance.

Notes

To open the Notes dialog, select Style→General...→Notes. The dialog can also be opened direct from the score by right-clicking on any note and selecting "Style…"

Here you can adjust the distance and thickness of note-related objects (stems, ledger lines, dots, accidentals). Changingthese would be unusual.

Beams

To open the Beams dialog, select Style→General...→Beams.

This allows you to set the overall properties of note beams in the score:

Beam thickness Beam distance: The vertical distance between beams. Broken beam minimum length: Affects secondary beams where they do not fully extend from note to note.

Ticking the Flatten all beams option means that all note beams will be horizontal only—not sloped.

Tuplets

To open the Tuplets dialog, select Format→Style...→Tuplets.

Vertical Distance from Notes:

Maximum slope: Limit the slope of tuplet brackets.

Vertical distance from stem: Refers to tuplet numbers and brackets. Vertical distance from notehead: Refers to tuplet numbers and brackets.

Horizontal distance from notes:

Distance before stem of first note: Sets default position of start of tuplet bracket when above/below note stems. Distance before head of first note: Sets default position of start of tuplet bracket when above/below noteheads. Distance after stem of last note: Sets default position of end of tuplet bracket when above/below note stems. Distance after head of last note: Sets default position of end of tuplet bracket when above/below noteheads.

Brackets:

Bracket thickness: Bracket hook height; Sets the default length of the vertical hooks at the ends of tuplet brackets

Properties:

Direction / Number type / Bracket type

Arpeggios

To open the Arpeggios dialog, select Format→Style...→Arpeggios.

Here you can change the distance to note, line thickness, and hook length of the following arpeggio and strum symbols:

To open the Slurs/Ties dialog, select Format→Style...→Slurs/Ties.

Line thickness at end

To open the Hairpins dialog, select Format→Style...→Hairpins.

Here you can set the default properties of hairpins (crescendo and decresendo lines):

Placement: Whether to place above or below the staff.

Position above/below: Set a numerical value in sp. units. Height: The width of the mouth of the hairpin. Continue height Autoplace distance to dynamics Line thickness

Volta

To open the Volta dialog, select Format→Style...→Volta.

Here you can set the default properties of voltas:

Default position: Set X- and Y-offsets.

Hook height: The length of descending lines at the ends of voltas. Line thickness Line style: A solid line is the default option, but there are dotted and dashed alternatives.

Ottava

To open the Ottava dialog, select Format→Style...→Ottava.

Here you can set the default properties of ottavas (octave lines):

Numbers only: If unticked, the ottava also displays "va" or "vb" after the number. Position above/below: Set the X- and Y-offsets for the ottava. Hook height above/below: The length of the ascending/descending line at the end of the ottava. Line thickness Line style: A solid line is the default option, but there are dotted and dashed alternatives.

Pedal

To open the Pedal dialog, select Format→Style...→Pedal.

Here you can set the default properties of pedallines:

Placement: Below or above the staff.

Position above/below: Set the exact default position using offset values. Line thickness: Line style: solid is the default but there is a range of dashed and dotted options.

Trill

To open the Trill dialog, select Format→Style...→Trill.

Here you can set the default placement of Trill lines:

Placement: Below or above the staff.

Position above/below: Set the exact default position using offset values.

Vibrato

To open the Vibrato dialog, select Format→Style...→Vibrato.

Here you can set the default placement of Vibrato lines:

Placement: Below or above the staff.

Position above/below: Set the exact default position using offset values.

157Bend

To open the Bend dialog, select Format→Style...→Bend.

Here you can set the display properties of Bends. This includes the line thickness, arrow width and font properties.

Text Line

To open the Text Line dialog, select Format→Style...→Text Line .

Here you can set the default placement of text lines:

Placement: Below or above the staff.

Position above/below: Set the exact default position using offset values.

Articulations, Ornaments

To open the Articulations, Ornaments dialog, select Format→Style...→Articulations, Ornaments.

This dialog allows you set the default placement distances and size (as a percentage) ofarticulations and ornaments.

Fermatas

To open the Fermatas dialog, select Format→Style...→Fermatas.

This dialog allows you set the default placement offermatas.

Staff Text

To open the Staff text dialog, select Format→Style...→Staff Text.

This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties ofstaff text.

Tempo Text

To open the Tempo text dialog, select Format→Style...→Staff Text.

This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties oftempo text.

Lyrics

To open the Lyrics dialog, select Format→Style...→Lyrics.

Placement, Position above/below: Set default position of the nearest lyric line to the staff.

158 Line height: Set the default distance between lyric lines. Lyrics dash: Set the length of inter-syllable dashes and the space between them. Lyrics melisma: Set default properties of melismas.

Dynamics

To open the Dynamics dialog, select Format→Style...→Dynamics.

This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties ofdynamics.

Rehearsal Marks

To open the Rehearsal Marks dialog, select Format→Style...→Rehearsal Marks.

This dialog allows you set the default placement and autoplacement properties ofrehearsal marks.

Figured Bass

To open the Figured Bass dialog, select Format→Style...→Figured Bass .

This allows you to set the default font, style, alignment and position offigured bass.

Chord Symbols

To open the Chord Symbols dialog, select Format→Style...→Chord Symbols.

This section allows you to adjust the format and positioning ofchord symbols:

Appearance:

Chose a default chord symbol style—Standard, Jazz or Custom.

Note spelling:

Chose the spelling convention for chord symbols and whether to use capital or small letters.

Positioning:

Distance to fretboard diagram: The distance (in sp. units) from a chord symbol to a fretboard diagram when both are applied to the same location on a staff. This value overrides the above "Default vertical position" setting. The user can chose to place a chord symbol below a fretboard diagram by entering a negative value. Minimum chord spacing: The minimum space to allow between chord symbols. Maximum barline distance: Increases the distance between the final chord symbol in a measure and the following barline. You may wish to adjust this value if there is a recurring problem in the score with overlap between the final chord symbol in one measure and the following chord symbol.

Capo:

Capo fret position: Enter the number of the capo position at which you want to display substitute chords, in brackets, for all chord symbols in the score.

Fretboard Diagrams

To open the Fretboard Diagrams dialog, select Format→Style...→Fretboard Diagrams .

This section allows you to adjust the format and positioning of Fretboard diagrams.

Default vertical position: the distance in sp. units from a newly applied fretboard diagram to a staff. A negative value may be used. Scale: Increase or decrease the size of the fretboard diagram in the score. Fret offset number font size: Increase or decrease the size of a fret number displayed next to a diagram. Position Left/Right: Display fret number to the left or right of the fretboard diagram. Barre line thickness: Make barre lines in fretboard diagrams thicker or thinner.

This dialog allows you to set the formatting ofall text styles. Individual text styles can also be set from theInspector.

OK / Cancel / Apply buttons

Any changes made in the Style dialog are immediately applied to the score, but can be rescinded at any time by pressingCancel—which also exits the dialog. Press OK to save your changes to the score and close the window.

If you are making formatting adjustments in an instrument part, use the Apply to all Parts button to apply all changes toallparts in the score.

Page Settings...

See Page settings.

Add / Remove System breaks

This tool adds or removes system breaks over all or part of the score:

1. Select a range of measures: if no selection is made, the command is applied to the whole score.

2. Chose Format→Add/Remove System Breaks…. The following dialog appears.

3. Chose one of the following options:

Break systems every X (select number) measures;

Add system break at end of each system; Remove current system breaks; 4. Press OK.

Stretch

Used to increase, decrease or reset the horizontal spacing of notes within selected measures.

Increase / Decrease layout stretch

1. Select a range of measures. Or use Ctrl+A to select the whole score.

2. Chose one of two options: To increase stretch: Use the shortcut } (right curly bracket) (Mac: Ctrl+Alt+9). Or from the menu bar, select Format→Stretch→Increase Layout Stretch . To decrease stretch: Use the shortcut { (left curly bracket) (Mac: Ctrl+Alt+8). Or from the menu bar, select Format→Stretch→Decrease Layout Stretch .

Reset stretch

To reset stretch to the default spacing of 1:

1. Select a range of measures. Or use Ctrl+A to select the whole score.

2. From the menu, select Format→Stretch→Reset Layout Stretch .

See also Measure Properties: Layout stretch. This allows you to set the stretch more precisely.

160Reset Style

To reset all text styles to the "factory" default settings:

From the menu, select Format→Reset Style .

Reset Beams

To restore beams to the mode defined in the local time signatures:

1. Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; 2. Select Format→Reset Beams.

Tutorial – How to create large-print stave notation (MSN)

To open the Measure dialog, select Format→Style...→Measure .

This allows you to adjust the distance between various items within measures.

Introduction

If you change a measure style property, MuseScore automatically adjusts the score to maintain the correct spacingbetween notes and rests according to best music engraving practice. It will also correctly reposition any elementsattached to notes or rests, such as fingerings, dynamics, lines etc.

All the properties listed below use the staff space (abbreviated to "sp") as the basic unit of measurement. SeePagesettings: Scaling for more details.

Options

Minimum measure width: Sets the minimum horizontal length of measures. In measures containing very little content (e.g., a single whole note or whole measure rest), the measure will only shrink as far as this minimum.

Spacing (1=tight): Condenses or expands the space after notes or rests. This setting thus affects not only space between notes but also between the last note and the ending barline. For the space between the beginning of the measure and the first note or rest, see Note left margin (below).

Note left margin: Sets the distance from the start barline to the first note.

Barline to grace note distance: Sets the distance between a barline and a grace note that occurs before the first actual note in a measure (independently of the "Note left margin" setting).

Barline to accidental distance: Sets the distance between a barline and an accidental placed before the first note in a measure (independently of the "Note left margin" setting).

Note to barline distance: Sets the distance from the last note to the following barline.

Minimum note distance: Specifies the smallest amount of space MuseScore will allow after each note (depending on other factors, more space may be allowed).

Clef left margin: Sets the distance between the very beginning of each line and the clef. (This option is rarely needed.)

Key signature left margin: Sets the distance between the beginning of the measure and a key signature.

Time signature left margin: Sets the distance between the beginning of the measure and a time signature (if there is no time signature in between).

Time signature to barline distance: To be added

Clef/key right margin: Sets the distance between the material at the beginning of each line (such as the clef and key signature) and the first note or rest of the first measure on the line. (Note that, although not named in the option, if a time signature is present, it is the element from which the spacing begins.)

Clef to barline distance: Sets the distance between a barline and a clef change preceding it.

Clef to key distance: Sets the distance from the clef to a key signature following it.

Clef to time signature distance: Sets the distance from the clef to the time signature following it (if there is no key signature in between).

Key to time signature distance: Sets the distance from a key signature to the following time signature.

Key to barline distance: To be added..

System header distance: To be added ...

System header with time signature distance: To be added ..

Multimeasure rest margin: Sets the distance between a multi-measure rest and the barlines on either side.

Staff line thickness: Sets the thickness of the lines of the staff, which allows you to make the staff thicker and darker, if you need greater visibility on your printouts.

162Page settings allows you to adjust the overall dimensions of your score such as page size, page margins, and scaling. Itis one of the main layout tools in MuseScore—along with the options available from Format→Style…

To open the Page settings dialog: from the menu, select Format → Page Settings....

Page size

Here you can select the paper format, either by standard name (e.g., Letter or A4), or by specifying the height and width ineither mm or inches (use the radio buttons to choose which unit of measurement to use). The initial default page sizedepends on your localization—in the United States, Letter size paper is standard.

You can also choose to format your music inLandscape or Portrait orientation using the radio buttons. You canoptionally use Two sided layout (i.e., book format, with mirror left and right margins for even and odd pages—seebelow).

Odd/Even Page Margins

The Even Page Margins and Odd Page Margins settings allow you to define the printable area of your pages. Asidefrom changing the margins around the music on the page, other settings, such as the positions of headers and footers,are calculated relative to the margins defined here.

If the "Two sided" checkbox under "Page Size" is selected, you can set margins differently for mirroring odd and evenpages. Otherwise, only one set of margins can be modified, but will apply to all pages.

The Scaling property allows you to increase or decrease the size of your score.

In MuseScore, the sizes of score elements, such as note heads, note stems, accidentals, clefs etc., are defined in termsof a unit of measurement called a staff space—abbreviated to sp. (see Glossary) . As you change the "Staff space"setting, all score elements follow suit and thus correct proportions are maintained. The exception isText in which you canset an absolute value, independent of "Scaling."

Note: Changing the "Scaling" does not always change the number of systems per page, because system distance canvary between limits set under "Min system distance" and "Max system distance" (see Style→General...→Page).

Unit

Here you can chose to display the values in Inches or millimeters.

163First page number

Sets the number of the first page of the particular score. Page numbers below 1 won't get printed—e.g., setting the firstpage number to -1 would result in the first and second page showing no page number, and page number 1 appearing onthe third page.

Apply to all Parts

The Apply to all Parts button is available when modifying a part, rather than the main score (see Part extraction). If youchange the page settings of one part and want the rest of the parts to have the same settings, this button will apply thechange to all parts in one go.

Breaks and spacers

The Breaks & Spacers palette contains the following non-printing symbols:

The first three symbols are called breaks; the blue vertical lines are known asspacers.

Breaks

A break can be applied to either a measure or a frame. There are three types:

System break: Forces the next part of the score to start in a new system. Page break: Forces the next part of the score to start on a new page. Section break: Forces the next part of the score to start in a new system and starts a newsection (see below). It can be combined with a page break if required.

Notes: (1) Blue break symbols are visible on the screen, but do not appear on printouts. (2) To add (or remove) systembreaks over all or part of the score, see Add/Remove System breaks. (3) To split a measure, see Measure operations:Split and join.

Add a break to a measure

Breaks can be added using either (1) a keyboard shortcut; or (2) a break symbol from a palette.

Using a keyboard shortcut

To add a System break or a Page break only:

1. Select any one of the following:

Barline; Measure; Notehead; Text element associated with a staff (e.g. lyric syllable, chord symbol, staff text etc.); Range of measures (if you chose this option, a break will be applied before and after the selection); 2. Chose one of the following options: System break: Press↵ (toggle). Page break: Press Ctrl+↵ (Mac: Cmd+↵) (toggle).

Using a palette break symbol

Any break can be added from a workspace palette:

1. Select any one of the following:

Barline; Measure; Notehead; Text element associated with a staff (e.g. lyric syllable, chord symbol, staff text etc.); Range of measures (if you chose this option, a break will be applied before and after the selection);

164 2. Double click a break symbol in a palette (toggle).

Alternatively, drag any break symbol from a palette onto a measure.

Add a break to a frame

To add a break to a frame, use one of the following options:

Drag a break from a palette onto a frame.

Select a frame then double-click a palette break symbol.

Delete breaks

Use one of the following options:

Select one or more breaks and press Del.

See also: Add / Remove System breaks.

Move a break

Although breaks are not visible on printed output, you can reposition one, if required, by enteringedit mode on it and usingthe keyboard arrow buttons (see Adjust position of text objects).

Section break

A Section break, as the name suggests, is used to create separate sections within a score. Like asystem break, it forcesthe next measure or frame to begin a new system, and can also be used in association with a page break if required. Asection break could be used, for example, to divide a piece into separate movements.

Each section can have its own measure numbering independent of the rest of the score. By default, the first measure of asection is numbered "1" (see image below), though like the first measure of the score itself, the number is not displayedunless configured in the measure properties dialog. The same dialog can be used to change the numbering according toyour preference.

If you change Time signature or Key signature at the beginning of the new section, there will be no courtesy signature atthe end of the previous section. See example below:

When you play back the score, the program adds a short pause between each section. In addition, the firstend repeatbarline in a section always sends the playback cursor to the beginning of the section, so astart repeat barline is optional.

Right click a Section break and select Section Break Properties... to specify:

Pause length; If the new section's first system shows long instrument names; If the new section starts numbering measures at 1.

Note: Spacers cannot be applied to a frame.

Use either of the following options:

Select a measure, then double-click a palette spacer symbol.

Blue spacer symbols are visible on the screen, but do not appear on printouts.

Note: Spacers are designed for local adjustments only. If you wish to adjust the space between staves across thewholescore, use the settings in Format → Style... → Page instead.

Adjust a spacer

To adjust the height of a spacer, choose one of these options:

Double-click the spacer and drag the blue end-handle up and down. Double-click the spacer and use the ↑ ↓ keys and/or Ctrl+↑ ↓ to move the end-handle up and down. Click (or double-click) on the spacer and adjust the height property in theInspector.

Delete a spacer

Click on the spacer and press the Del key.

See also

Add/Remove System breaks

Frames

A Frame is a rectangular container for empty space, text or pictures in the score. It can be one of three types:

Horizontal: Used to create a break in a particular system. Can contain one or more text objects and/or images. Vertical: Inserted above a system or appended to the last system. Can contain one or more text objects and/or images. Text: Inserted above a system or appended to the last system. Can contain one text object only.

Horizontal frame

A horizontal frame is used to create a break in a system. For example, you can:

Create a coda, with an adjustable gap separating it from the rest of the score (as in the example below).

Create an offset at the beginning of the score, where there is no staff name to perform the same function. Create an adjustable right margin at the end of a system. Create space for some text or image(s). Create a space between a 'historical incipit' and the beginning of the modern edition.

Insert/append horizontal frame

See Create a Frame (below).

Adjust width of horizontal frame

Use one of the following methods:

Double-click the frame and drag the handle to the right or left. Select the frame and adjust "Width" in theInspector.

166Add text or image to horizontal frame

To add text: Right-click on the frame, select Add, and chose one of the text options.

To add an image: Right-click on the frame and select Add → Picture.

Vertical frame

A vertical frame can be inserted above a system or appended to the last system. It can contain one or more text objectsand/or images. The height is adjustable and the width equals the system width.

It can be used, for example, to:

Create an area at the head of a score for Title/Subtitle/Composer/Lyricist text etc. (see below). Add single- or multi-column lyric text (at the end of a score). Create a title page. Create subtitles and other annotations between systems.

Insert/append vertical frame

See Create a Frame (below).

Adjust height of vertical frame

Use one of the following methods:

Double-click the frame and drag the handle up or down.

Select the frame and adjust "Height" in the Inspector.

Edit vertical frame properties

Selecting the frame allows you to adjust various parameters in the Inspector:

Add text or image to vertical frame

To add text: Right-click on the frame, select Add, and chose one of the text options.

To add an image: Right-click on the frame and select Add → Picture.

You can create as many objects as you like within a frame. Their positions can be adjusted independently by dragging or,more accurately, by altering the offset values in the Inspector. To format text objects, see Text editing and Text styles andproperties.

Insert horizontal frame in vertical frame

The horizontal frame is automatically left-aligned and fills the entire vertical frame. To right-align it:

1. Reduce the width of the horizontal frame.

2. Deselect the frame then drag it to the right. To restore left-alignment, drag the frame to the left.

"Title" frame

A vertical frame is automatically created at the beginning of a score, showing the title, subtitle, composer, lyricist etc.,when you fill in the information fields provided on page 1 of the New Score Wizard.

If the score does not have a vertical frame at the beginning, you can create one as follows:

2. Type the desired text; 3. Press Esc, or click on an empty space, to exit.

Text frame

A Text frame looks like a vertical frame, but is specialized for text input: one text object is allowed per frame. The heightautomatically expands to fit the content and there is no height adjustment handle.

A text frame can be used, for example, to:

Create lyric text at the end of a score.

Create subtitles and other annotations between systems.

Insert/ append text frame

See Create a Frame (below).

Edit text frame properties

Selecting the frame allows you to adjust various parameters in the Inspector:

Text Properties: to put a visual frame (border) around text.

How to add a block of text to a score

You can use Images to illustrate scores, or to add symbols that are not included in the standardpalettes. MuseScoresupports the following formats:

PNG (*.png) JPEG (*.jpg and *.jpeg) SVG (*.svg) (MuseScore currently does not support SVG shading, blurring, clipping or masking.)

Add image

Use one of the following options:

Drag-and-drop an image file (from outside MuseScore) either into a vertical or horizontalframe, or onto a note or rest in the score. Right-click on a frame, select Add→Picture, then pick an image from the file selector.

Cut/copy and paste image

1. Click on an image in the score.

2. Apply any of the standard copy/cut commands. 3. Click on a note, rest or frame. 4. Apply any of the standard paste commands.

Modify image

To modify the width/height of an image, double-click it and drag any of the handles. If you want to adjust width or heightseparately, untick "Lock aspect ratio" first in the Inspector.

You can adjust the position of an image by simply dragging it.

See also

Image capture Custom palettes

External links

How to create an ossia with image capture

How to create an ossia with another staff

Image capture

MuseScore's image capture feature allows you to save a snapshot of any part of the score window. PNG, PDF and SVGformats are supported.

Save a snapshot

1. Click on the Toggle image capture button, .

2. Press Shift + drag, to create a new selection rectangle.

169 3. Fine tune the rectangle position, if required, by dragging it and/or changing the "Position" values in the "Lasso" section of the Inspector. 4. Fine tune the rectangle area, if required, by dragging the handles, and/or changing the "Size" values in the Inspector.

5. Right-click on the selection rectangle to open the Image Capture menu. Select the desired option:

Save As (Print Mode). This saves an image of the selection area as it would look if printed, e.g.

Save as (Screenshot Mode). This saves a selection of the actual screen, including any line break symbols, invisible elements etc., e.g.

You can save the image in either PNG (default), SVG or PDF format.

Image capture menu

Copy image: Chose this to copy an image before pasting it in the same or another MuseScore file. Resolution: Set the resolution, and hence the size of the saved or copied image. Try 100 dpi to start with, if you are unsure. Transparent background: Turn image transparency on or off. Auto re-size to page: Adjusts the selection rectangle to fit the page. Resize to A/B/C/D: Chose a customized selection rectangle (as set below). Set Standard Size: Resize the selection rectangle, then chose "Set size A/B/C/D" to store it.

See also

Image

External links

Create an ossia with image capture

170 How to create an ossia with another staff

Align elements

While dragging an element:

Press Ctrl to constrain movement to the horizontal only.

Press Shift to constrain movement to the vertical only.

Snap to grid

Snap to grid is a feature which allows you to drag an element in precise steps—useful for exact positioning.

To enable snap to grid, select an element and click one or both of the snap to grid buttons, located to the right of thehorizontal and vertical offset fields in the Inspector. You can then drag the element in steps equal to thegrid spacing.The default value is 0.5 sp.

To change the grid spacing:

1. Right-click on any of the snap to grid buttons in the Inspector, and select Configure Grid . 2. Set values for the horizontal and vertical grid spacing as required. Note that this is a fractional setting.

Advanced topicsAccessibility

Introduction

This document is written for blind and visually impaired users of MuseScore 2.x. It is not intended to provide a fulldescription of all of the features of MuseScore; you should read this in conjunction with the regular MuseScoredocumentation.

MuseScore comes with support for the free and open source NVDA screen reader for Windows. The features in thisdocument have been tested on Windows with NVDA. There is no support at the moment for other screen readers such asJaws for Windows, or VoiceOver for macOS, which may work differently, or not at all.

At this point in time, MuseScore 2.x is mostly accessible as a score reader, not so much as a score editor. This documentwill focus on the score reading features, with only a brief description of score editing.

Initial setup

When you run MuseScore for the first time, you may want to permanently disable the Start Center window. To do so, goclose the Start Center window first, then the Edit menu (Alt+E), choose Preferences, and in there, uncheck Show StartCenter. Save and close the preferences window.

Finding your way around

The user interface in MuseScore works much like other notation programs, or other document-oriented programs ingeneral. It has a single main document window in which you can work with a score. MuseScore supports multipledocument tabs within this window. It also supports a split-screen view to let you work with two documents at once, and youcan have multiple tabs in each window.In addition to the score window, MuseScore has a menu bar that you can access via the shortcuts for the individualmenus:

File: Alt+F Edit: Alt+E View: Alt+V Add: Alt+A Notes: Alt+N

171 Layout: Alt+L Style: Alt+S Plugins: Alt+P Help: Alt+H

Of these, only the File menu is of much interest when using MuseScore as a score reader. Once opening a menu, it maytake several presses of the Up or Down keys before everything is read properly.

There are also a number of toolbars, palettes, and subwindows within MuseScore, and you can cycle through the controlsin these using Tab (or Shift+Tab to move backwards through this same cycle). When you first start MuseScore, or load ascore, focus should be in the main score window. Pressing Tab takes you to a toolbar containing a series of buttons foroperations like New, Open, Play, and so forth. Tab will skip any buttons that aren't currently active. The names andshortcuts (where applicable) for these buttons should be read by your screen reader.

Once you have cycled through the buttons on the toolbar, the next window Tab will visit is the Palette. This would be usedto add various elements to a score, but it is not currently accessible except for two buttons that are visited by Tab: a dropdown to select between different workspaces (a saved arrangement of palettes), and a button to create a new workspace.

If you have opened one of the optional windows, such as the Inspector, or the Selection Filter, the Tab key will also visitthese. You can close windows you do not need by going to the View menu and making sure none of the first set ofcheckboxes are selected (the windows that appear before the Zoom settings). By default, only the Start Center, Palettesand Inspector should be selected. See Initial Setup for instructions for disabling the Start Center. F9 can be used to togglethe Palettes while F8 will toggle the Inspector.

To return focus to the score window after visiting the toolbar, or a subwindow, press Esc. This also clears any selectionyou may have made in the score window.

The score window

When you first start MuseScore 2.x, an empty example score entitled “My First Score” is loaded by default. If you wish toexperiment with editing features, this would be a good place to begin. Otherwise, you will probably want to start by loadinga score. MuseScore uses the standard shortcuts to access system commands like Ctrl+O (Mac: Cmd+O) to open a file, Ctrl+S(Mac: Cmd+S) to save, Ctrl+W (Mac: Cmd+W) to close, etc.

If you press Ctrl+O (Mac: Cmd+O) to load a score, you are presented with a fairly standard file dialog. MuseScore can openscores in its own format (MSCZ or MSCX) as well as import scores in the standard MusicXML format, in MIDI format, orfrom a few other programs such as Guitar Pro, Capella, and Band-in-a-Box. Once you have loaded a score, it is displayedin a new tab within the score window. You can move between the tabs in the score window using Ctrl+Tab (does not applyfor Mac).

There are a few interesting things you can do with a loaded score besides reading it note by note. You can press Space tohave MuseScore play the score for you. You can use File / Export to convert to another format, including PDF, PNG,WAV, MP3, MIDI, MusicXML, etc. And of course, you can print it via File / Print or Ctrl+P (Mac: Cmd+P).

If a score contains multiple instruments, it may already have linked parts generated. Linked parts are presented as parttabs within score tabs, but currently, there is no way to navigate these part tabs using the keyboard. The parts would notnormally contain information different from the score; they would just be displayed differently (each part on its own page).If a score does not already have parts generated, you can do so through File / Parts, and that dialog is accessible. If youwish to print the parts, you can work around the inability of accessing part tabs individually by using the File / Export Partsdialog, which automatically exports PDF’s (or other formats) for all parts in one step.

Score reading

When you first load a score, the score window has the keyboard focus, but there will be nothing selected. The first step toreading a score is to select something, and the most natural place to begin is with the first element of the score. Ctrl+Home(Mac: Cmd+Home) will do this. You will probably also want to use this, should you ever clear your selection by pressingEsc.

As you navigate between elements, your screen reader should give the name of the selected element (most likely the clefat the beginning of the top staff of your score). You will hear it read the name of the element (for example, “Treble clef”)and also give position information (for example, “Measure 1; Beat 1; Staff 1”). The amount of information read is notcurrently customizable, but we tried to place the most important first so you can quickly move on to the next elementbefore it has finished reading, or just ignore the rest of what is read. Pressing Shift currently interrupts the reading, whichmight also be useful.

172Most navigation in MuseScore is centered around notes and rests only – it will skip clefs, key signatures, time signatures,barlines, and other elements. So if you just use the standard Right and Left keys to move through your score, you will onlyhear about notes and rests (and the elements attached to them). However, there are two special navigation commandsthat you will find useful to gain a more complete summarization of the score:

Next element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Right (Mac: Cmd+Option+Shift+Right)

Previous element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Left (Mac: Cmd+Option+Shift+Left

These commands include clefs and other elements that the other navigation commands skip, and also navigate throughall voices within the current staff, whereas other navigation commands such as Right and Left only navigate through thecurrently selected voice until you explicitly change voices. For instance, if you are on a quarter note on beat 1 of measure1, and there are two voices in that measure, then pressing Right will move on to the next note of voice 1—which will be onbeat 2—whereas pressing Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Right (Mac: Cmd+Option+Shift+Right) will stay on beat 1 but move to the note on voice2. Only once you have moved through all notes on the current beat on the current staff will the shortcut move you on tothe next beat. The intent is that this shortcut should be useful for navigating through a score if you don’t already knowwhat the contents are.

When you navigate to an element, your screen reader should read information about it. For notes and rests, it will alsoread information about elements attached to them, such as lyrics, articulations, chord symbols, etc. For the time being,there is no way to navigate directly to these elements.One important note: Up and Down by themselves, with Shift, or with Ctrl / Cmd are not useful shortcuts for navigation! Instead,they change the pitch of the currently selected note or notes. Be careful not to inadvertently edit a score you are trying toread. Up and Down should only be used with Alt/Option if your intent is navigation only. See the list of navigation shortcutsbelow.

Moving forwards or backwards in time

The following shortcuts are useful for moving “horizontally” through a score:

Next element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Right

Previous element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Left Next chord or rest: Right Previous chord or rest: Left Next measure: Ctrl+Right Previous measure: Ctrl+Left Go to measure: Ctrl+F First element: Ctrl+Home Last element: Ctrl+End

Moving between notes at a given point in time

The following shortcuts are useful for moving “vertically” through a score:

Next element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Right

Previous element: Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Left

Next higher note in voice, previous voice, or staff above:Alt+Up Next lower note in voice, next voice, or staff below:Alt+Down Top note in chord: Ctrl+Alt+Up Bottom note in chord: Ctrl+Alt+Down

The Alt+Up and Alt+Down commands are similar to the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Right and Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Left commands in that they aredesigned to help you discover the content of a score. You do not need to know how many notes are in a chord, how manyvoices are in a staff, or how many staves are in a score in order to move vertically through the score using thesecommands.

Filtering score reading

Excluding certain elements like lyrics, or chord names while reading the score is possible by using the Selection filter F6 ( ).Uncheck those elements you don't want to read.

Score playback

The Space bar serves both to start and stop playback. Playback will start with the currently selected note if one is selected;

173where playback was last stopped if no note is selected; or at the beginning of the score on first playback.

MuseScore supports looped playback so you can repeat a section of a piece for practice purposes. To set the “in” and“out” points for the loop playback via the Play Panel (F11):

1. First select the note in the score window where the loop should start 2. Go to the Play Panel and press the Set loop In position toggle button 3. Back to the score window, navigate to the note where you want the loop to end 4. Switch again to Play Panel, and press the Set loop Out position toggle button 5. To enable or disable the loop, press the Loop Playback toggle button

You can also control the loop playback and control other playback parameters, such as overriding the basic tempo of ascore, using the View / Play Panel (F11).

Score editing

Score editing is currently not very accessible – too many score elements require intervention of the mouse in order toplace objects onto a score. Additionally, visual reference and manual adjustment of the position of various elements issometimes necessary due to MuseScore's limited support for conflict avoidance of elements.

In contrast, MuseScore does often provide ample default, and a platform to experiment with the basics of note input.To enter note input mode, first navigate to the measure in which you would like to enter notes, then press “N”. Almosteverything about note input is designed to be keyboard accessible, and the standard documentation should be good tohelp you through the process. Bear in mind that MuseScore can either be in note input or normal mode, and it won’talways be clear which mode of these you are in. When in doubt, press Esc. If you were in note input mode, this will takeyou out. If you were in normal mode, you will stay there, although you will also lose your selection.

Customization

You can customize the keyboard shortcuts using Edit / Preferences / Shortcuts. At some point, we may provide a set ofspecial accessibility-optimized shortcuts and/or a way of saving and loading sets of shortcut definitions.

External links

Creating a New Score in MuseScore with NVDA

The Album feature is has been disabled for the initial 3.0 release. It will come back in a later patch release

The Album Manager allows you to prepare a list of multiple scores and save the list as an album file ("*.album"), print allthe scores as one long print job with consistent page numbers, or even join the scores into a single new MSCZ score.This is ideal for preparing an exercise book or combining multiple movements of an orchestration.

To open the Album Manager, go to File → Album...

Create album

174 1. To create a new album, click the New button. Fill in a title in the "Album Name:" box at the top. 2. To add scores to the album, click Add Score. A file selection dialog will appear and let you choose one or multiple scores from your file system. Click OK. 3. The scores you add will appear in a list in the Album Manager. You can rearrange their order by selecting a score and clicking the Up or Down button.

Load album

If you have previously created an album, you can open it through the Album Manager by clicking theLoad button. A fileselection dialog will appear to let you load the .album file from your file system.

Print album

To print an album as if it were a single document, click Print Album . The scores loaded into the Album Manager are printedin the order they are listed in with the correct page numbers, ignoring the page number offset values in Layout → PageSettings... → First page number for all but the first score. As the album is printed in one print job, double-sided printing (duplexprinting) also works as expected.

Join scores

To combine multiple scores into a single .mscz file, click Join Scores. The scores are combined in the selected order intoone single score. If not already present, line- and section breaks are added to the last measure orframe of each score inthe combined file.All style settings are taken from the first score, different style settings from subsequent score are ignored.

All the scores should have the same number of parts and staves for this to work correctly, ideally with the sameinstruments in the same order. If the scores have the same total number of instruments but not the same ones, or not inthe same order, then the instrument names from the first score will overwrite ones from subsequent scores. If some of thescores have fewer instruments than the first score, then empty staves will be created for those sections. Any part or staffthat is not present in the first score will be lost in the joined score.

Save album

Upon clicking the Close button, you will be prompted to save your album as a .album file. This file is not the same as ajoined score; it simply consists of the list of scores. Album files can be loaded into the Album Manager as describedabove.

Automatic placement

MuseScore initially places elements in the score according to the default properties specified inStyle. And if elementshave automatic placement enabled, MuseScore attempts to avoid collisions by moving one or more of them as needed.

Default position

The default position for most elements is controlled by their style settings. The specific properties you can set vary byelement type but may include:

Placement: Whether the element appears above or below the staff.

Offset: For elements with no "Placement above/below" properties, this specifies the default position. SeeOffset X/Y. Autoplace min distance: Minimum distance from other elements when autoplace is enabled.

For details of the settings available for each element type, seeLayout and formatting: Style.

To change the default position:

Use one of the following methods:

From the menu, select Format→Style; chose an element type and then adjust the placement/position settings. Select a relevant element in the score and change the placement/position settings in theInspector; then press the Set as style" button (S) to update the Style settings.

Manual adjustments

175After an element had been automatically placed, its position can be changed manually using one of the following methods:

Select the element and adjust the X and Y offsets in the Inspector. Drag and drop the element using the mouse. Change to edit mode and move the element using the arrow buttons.

If the element type can be placed both above and below the staff, you can change the position by:

Changing the "Placement" settings in the Inspector

Using X to flip between above/below

Note: When automatic placement is enabled for an element, you cannot position it in a way that causes a collision withother elements.

Disabling automatic placement

Select the element and uncheck the "Automatic placement" box in theInspector.

The element reverts to its default position. It can be repositioned as desired and is no longer avoided when placing otherelements.

Stacking order

To change the value for Stacking order:

Select the element and change the "Stacking order" value in the Inspector.

In cases where elements are allowed to overlap, Stacking order controls the order in which they are placed on top ofeach other. The element with the lower value will be placed behind.

Cross-staff notation

In piano scores, it is common to write a musical phrase extending across both staves—bass and treble. This can beentered in MuseScore as follows:

1. Enter the notation in one staff to begin with. e.g.

2. Select a note and press Ctrl+Shift + ↓/↑ (Mac: ⌘+Shift + ↓/↑). This moves all the notes in thatvoice down/up to the other staff. e.g.

Note: If you only want to move certain notes in a chord you need to ensure that they are in a separate voice.

3. To adjust the beam, double-click it to show the handles. Use thekeyboard arrows or drag the handles to change the beam angle and position:

176See also

Connect barlines: How to extend barlines over multiple staves.

External links

How to span a chord or stem over two staves (MuseScore "Howto")

Early music features

MuseScore offers several specialized functions to create engravings of early music (particularly medieval andrenaissance) akin to commercial editions from the 20th century onwards.

Unbarred (or unmetered) notation

In MuseScore, notes lasting longer than the duration of a measure are normally tied across barlines. However MuseScorehas a special feature which allows it to display the note values intact, without splitting and tying them in this way. Thisenables you to notate music which is unbarred (i.e. not divided into measures), such as that of the renaissance:

2. The same excerpt displayed in MuseScore:

4. To get rid of the barlines, just untick the “Show barlines” box in the Staff / Part properties dialog. See also Mensurstrich (below).

Note: The feature is still in development and may contain bugs. The longest supported note value is the longa (a dottedlonga is still broken up and tied over).

Mensurstrich

Since a complete lack of barlines could make performing the music more difficult for current musicians, many modernengravers settled on a compromise called Mensurstrich, where barlines are drawn between, but not across, staves.

177To place barlines between staves:

1. In the staff below the proposed Mensurstriche, uncheck "Show barlines" in the Staff / Part Properties dialog; 2. In the staff above where you want the Mensurstriche, right-click on one barline and chose Select→All Similar Elements in Same Staff; 3. In the Barline section of the Inspector, tick the "Span to next staff" option; 4. In the Barline section of the Inspector, adjust the "Span from" value so that the top of the barlines meet the bottom line of the staff; 5. Repeat for other staves as required.

Ambitus

Before there was the concept of an absolute pitch, performers were required to transpose vocal music to a singable rangefor their ensemble "on the fly." To aid them, an ambitus was sometimes included, marking the entire range of a voice atthe beginning of the piece.

To apply an ambitus, use one of the following methods:

Drag the ambitus symbol (from the Lines palette of the Advanced workspace) onto a clef. Select a clef, then double-click the ambitus symbol (in theLines palette of the Advanced workspace).

When applied, the ambitus automatically displays the note range of the score: if there is asection break then only the noterange of the section is displayed. Beyond the section break a new ambitus may be applied.

The note range of the ambitus can be adjusted manually by selecting it and changing the "Top note" and "Bottom note"values in the Inspector. For automatic adjustment click the Update Range button in the inspector.

Mensural time signatures

In the mensural notation system, time signatures did not define the length of a measure, but the length of breves andsemibreves. MuseScore supports mensural time symbols as a display method in the Time signature properties dialograther than as symbols, but they are just for show, as the proportion of e.g. half notes per whole notes cannot be modified.

One way to make use of these symbols is to replicate when composers of the renaissance had multiple voices in differenttime signatures simultaneously without using tuplets. Edit the time signature on a per-staff basis, as long as the beginningand end of a measure in all staves match up. If they do not, then consider increasing the size of the measures to thelowest common denominator.

178De Profundis Clamavi for 5 voices by Josquin Des Prez

See also

Measure Operations: Split and join

Figured bass

Adding a new figured bass indication

1. Select the note to which the figured bass applies;

2. Press the Figured Bass shortcut. The default isCtrl+G (Mac: ⌘+G): this can be changed in Prefences: Shortcuts if desired; 3. Enter the text in the editor 'blue box' as required (see below); 4. Use one of the following options as required: Press Space to move to the next note ready for another figured bass indication (or click outside the editor box to exit it). The editor advances to the next note, or to the rest of the staff to which figured bass is being added. (To move to a point in between, or to extend a figured bass group for a longer duration, see Duration (below)).

Shift+Spacemoves the editing box to the previous staff note or rest.

Tab advances the editing box to the beginning of the next measure. Shift+Tab moves the editing box to the beginning of the previous measure.

Text format

Digits

Digits are entered directly. Groups of several digits stacked one above the other are also entered directly in a single text,stacking them with Enter:

Accidentals

Accidentals can be entered using regular keys:

These characters will automatically turn into the proper signs when you leave the editor. Accidentals can be enteredbefore, or after a digit (and of course, in place of a digit, for altered thirds), according to the required style; both styles areproperly aligned, with the accidental 'hanging' at the left, or the right.

Combined shapes

Slashed digits or digits with a cross can be entered by adding\, / or + after the digit (combining suffixes); the propercombined shape will be substituted when leaving the editor:

The built-in font can manage combination equivalence, favoring the more common substitution:

1+, 2+, 3+, 4+ result in (or )

and 5\, 6\, 7\, 8\, 9\ result in (or )

Please remember that / can only by combined with 5; any other 'slashed' figure is rendered with a question mark.

+ can also be used before a digit; in this case it is not combined, but it is properly aligned ('+' hanging at the left side).

Parentheses

Open and closed parentheses, both round: '(', ')' and square: '[', ']', can be inserted before and after accidentals, beforeand after a digit, before and after a continuation line; added parentheses will not disturb the proper alignment of the maincharacter.

Notes: (1) The editor does not check that parentheses, open and closed, round or square, are properly balanced. (2)Several parentheses in a row are non-syntactical and prevent proper recognition of the entered text. (3) A parenthesisbetween a digit and a combining suffix ('+', '\', '/') is accepted, but prevents shape combination.

Continuation lines

Continuation lines are input by adding an '_' (underscore) at the end of the line. Each digit of a group can have its owncontinuation line:

180Continuation lines are drawn for the whole duration of the figured bass group.

'Extended' continuation lines

Occasionally, a continuation line has to connect with the continuation line of a following group, when a chord degree hasto be kept across two groups. Examples (both from J. Boismortier, Pièces de viole, op. 31, Paris 1730):

In the first case, each group has its own continuation line; in the second, the continuation line of the first group is carried'into' the second.

This can be obtained by entering several (two or more) underscores "__" at the end of the text line of the first group.

Duration

Each figured bass group has a duration, which is indicated by a light gray line above it (of course, this line is for informationonly and it is not printed or exported to PDF).

Initially, a group has the same duration of the note to which it is attached. A different duration may be required to fitseveral groups under a single note or to extend a group to span several notes.

To achieve this, each key combination in the table below can be used to (1) advance the editing box by the indicatedduration, and (2) set the duration of the previous group up to the new editing box position.

Pressing several of them in sequence without entering any figured bass text repeatedly extends the previous group.

Font: The dropdown list contains all the fonts which have been configured for figured bass. A standard installation contains only one font, "MuseScore Figured Bass," which is also the default font. Size: Select a font-size in points.Note: This value is also modified by any change made toScaling (Format → Page Settings…), or Scale ("Staff properties"). Vertical Position: The distance (in spaces) from the top of the staff to the top margin of the figured bass text. Negative values go up (figured bass above the staff) and positive values go down (figured bass below the staff: a value greater than 4 is needed to step over the staff itself).

Line Height: The distance between the base line of each figured bass line, as a percentage of font size.

The following picture visualizes each numeric parameter:

Alignment: Select the vertical alignment: with Top, the top line of each group is aligned with the main vertical position and the group 'hangs' from it (this is normally used with figured bass notation and is the default); with Bottom, the bottom line is aligned with the main vertical position and the group 'sits' on it (this is sometimes used in some kinds of harmonic analysis notations):

Style: Chose between "Modern" or "Historic." The difference between the two styles is shown below:

Proper syntax

For the relevant substitutions and shape combinations to take effect and for proper alignment, the figured bassmechanism expects input texts to follow some rules (which are in any case, the rules for a syntactical figured bassindication):

182 There can be only one accidental (before or after), or only one combining suffix per figure; There cannot be both an accidental and a combining suffix; There can be an accidental without a digit (altered third), but not a combining suffix without a digit. Any other character not listed above is not expected.

If a text entered does not follow these rules, it will not be processed: it will be stored and displayed as it is, without anylayout.

Summary of keys

Type: to get:Ctrl+G Adds a new figured bass group to the selected note.Space Advances the editing box to the next note.Shift+Space Moves the editing box to the previous note.Tab Advances the editing box to the next measure.Shift+Tab Moves the editing box to the previous measure.Ctrl+1 Advances the editing box by 1/64, setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+2 Advances the editing box by 1/32, setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+3 Advances the editing box by 1/16, setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+4 Advances the editing box by 1/8 (quaver), setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+5 Advances the editing box by 1/4 (crochet), setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+6 Advances the editing box by a half note (minim), setting the duration of the previous group. Advances the editing box by a whole note (semibreve), setting the duration of the previousCtrl+7 group.Ctrl+8 Advances the editing box by two whole notes (breve), setting the duration of the previous group.Ctrl+Space Enters an actual space; useful when figure appears "on the second line" (e.g., 5 4 -> 3).BB Enters a double flat.B Enters a flat.H Enters a natural.# Enters a sharp.## Enters a double sharp._ Enters a continuation line.__ Enters an extended continuation line.

Note: For Mac commands, Ctrl is replaced with ⌘.

File formats

MuseScore can import and export a wide variety of file formats, allowing you to share and publish scores in the format thatbest meets your needs.

MuseScore native format

MuseScore saves files in the following native formats:

*.mscz: The default MuseScore file format. Being compressed it takes up relatively little disk space. *.mscx: An uncompressed MuseScore file format, mainly used for debugging or storing in a versioning system .*.mscz, / .*.mscx,: These are backup files. Notice the point (full stop) added before the file name, and the comma added to the file extension.

A note about fonts: MuseScore does not embed text fonts in saved or exported native format files. If you want yourMuseScore file to be viewed by other MuseScore users, make sure you are using the built-in FreeSerif or FreeSans fontfamilies for your text, or a font that the other parties have installed too. If a system does not have the fonts specified inyour original file, MuseScore will use a fallback option, which may cause your score to appear differently.

MuseScore format (*.mscz)

MSCZ is the standard MuseScore file format and recommended for most uses. A score saved in this format takes up verylittle disk space, but preserves all the necessary information. The format is a ZIP-compressed version of .mscx files and

183includes any images the score may contain and a thumbnail.

Uncompressed MuseScore format (*.mscx)

MSCX is the uncompressed version of the MuseScore file format. A score saved in this format will retain all information,except images. It can be opened with a text editor, allowing the user access to the file's source code.

MuseScore backup file (.*.mscz,) or (.*.mscx, )

Backup files are created automatically and saved in the same folder as your normal MuseScore file. The backup copycontains the previously saved version of the MuseScore file and can be important if your normal copy becomes corrupted,or for looking at an older version of the score.

The backup file adds a period to the beginning of the file name .() and a comma (,) to the end (e.g. if your normal file iscalled "untitled.mscz", the backup copy will be ".untitled.mscz,"), and the period and comma need to be removed from thename in order to open the backup file in MuseScore. As it is stored in the same folder as your normal MuseScore file, youmay also need to give it a unique name (e.g. changing ".untitled.mscz," to "untitled-backup1.mscz").

Note: In order to see the MuseScore backup files, you may need to change your system settings to "Show hidden files".See also How to recover a backup copy of a score .

Graphic files (export only)

MuseScore can export a score as a graphic file in eitherPDF, PNG or SVG format.

PDF (*.pdf)

PDF (Portable Document Format) files are ideal for sharing your sheet music with others who do not need to edit thecontent. This is a very widely-used format and most users will have a PDF viewer of some kind on their computers.

To set the resolution of exported PDFs:

1. From the menu bar, chose Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...), and select the "Export" tab; 2. Set the resolution in the "PDF" section.

PNG (*.png)

PNG (Portable Network Graphics) files are based on a bitmap image format, widely supported by software on Windows,Mac OS, and Linux, and very popular on the web. MuseScore creates PNG images as they would appear if printed, oneimage per page.

To set the resolution of exported PNG images:

1. From the menu bar, chose Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...), and select the "Export" tab; 2. Set the resolution and transparency in the PNG/SVG section.

Note: If you want to create images that show only parts of the score (with or without screen-only items such as frameboxes, invisible notes, and out-of-range note colors), use Image capture instead.

SVG (*.svg)

SVG (Scalable Vector Graphics) files can be opened by most web browsers (except Internet Explorer before version 9)and most vector graphics software. However, most SVG software does not support embedded fonts, so the appropriateMuseScore fonts must be installed to view these files correctly. SVG is the current format for all scores saved onMuseScore.com.

To set resolution and transparency of exported SVG files, see the instructions underPNG (above). Note that MuseScoredoes not (yet) support gradients on export (although it does for images in a score).

Audio files (export only)

MuseScore can create normalized, stereo audio of the score in any of the following formats:WAV, MP3, OGG VORBIS,FLAC. To export an audio file:

184 1. From the menu, select File → Export...; 2. Chose the desired format from the dropdown menu, then pressSave.

You can adjust the sample rate of all audio formats as follows:

1. From the menu bar, select Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...), and click on the Export tab; 2. Set "Sample rate" in the "Audio" section.

WAV audio ( *.wav)

WAV (Waveform Audio Format) is an uncompressed sound format. This was developed by Microsoft and IBM, and iswidely supported by software for Windows, OS X, and Linux. It is an ideal format for use when creating CDs, as full soundquality is preserved. For sharing via email or the internet, use a compressed alternative such as MP3.

MP3 ( *.mp3)

MP3 is a very widely-used compressed audio format. MP3 files are ideal for sharing and downloading over the internetdue to their relatively small size.

To set the MP3 bitrate:

1. From the menu bar, chose Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...), and select the "Export" tab; 2. Set the MP3 bitrate in the "Audio" section.

FLAC audio ( *.flac)

Free Lossless Audio Codec (FLAC) is compressed audio format. FLAC files are approximately half the size ofuncompressed audio and just as good quality. Windows and OS X do not have built-in support for FLAC, but softwaresuch as the free and open source VLC media player can play FLAC files on any operating system.

Ogg Vorbis (*.ogg)

Ogg Vorbis is intended as a patent-free replacement for the popular MP3 audio format (which MuseScore also supports—see above). Like MP3, Ogg Vorbis files are relatively small (often a tenth of uncompressed audio), but some soundquality is lost. Windows and OS X do not have built-in support for Ogg Vorbis. However, software such as VLC mediaplayer and Firefox can play Ogg files on any operating system.

Share with other music software

MuseScore can import and export MusicXML and MIDI files; it is also able to import a variety of native format files fromother music notation programs.

MusicXML (*.xml, *.musicxml)

MusicXML is the universal standard for sheet music. It is the recommended format for sharing sheet music betweendifferent scorewriters, including MuseScore, Sibelius, Finale, and more than 100 others. MuseScore imports *.xml and*.musicxml, but exports only *.musicxml. If you need *.xml (because the program you want to import it needs that), you need torename it yourself after the export.

Compressed MusicXML ( *.mxl)

Compressed MusicXML creates smaller files than regular MusicXML. This is a newer standard and isn't as widelysupported by older scorewriters, but MuseScore has full import and export support.

MIDI (*.mid, *.midi, *.kar)

MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a format widely supported by sequencers and music notation software. Fordetails of the protocol see the MIDI Association website.

MIDI files are very useful for playback purposes but contain little in the way of score layout information (formatting, pitchspelling, voicing, ornaments, articulations, repeats, key signatures etc.). To share files between different music notationsoftware, MusicXML is recommended instead.

For details about how to import MIDI files seeMIDI import.

185MuseData (*.md) (import only)

MuseData is a format developed by Walter B. Hewlett beginning in 1983 as an early means of sharing music notationbetween software. It has since been eclipsed by MusicXML, but several thousand scores in this format are still availableonline.

Capella (*.cap, *.capx) (import only)

CAP and CAPX files are created by the score writer,Capella . MuseScore imports version 2000 (3.0) or later fairlyaccurately.

Bagpipe Music Writer ( *.bww) (import only)

BWW files are created by the niche score writer,Bagpipe Music Writer .

BB (*.mgu , *.sgu) (import only)

BB files are created by the music arranging software,Band-in-a-Box . MuseScore's support is currently experimental.

Overture (*.ove) (import only)

OVE files are created by the score writerOverture . This format is mainly popular in Chinese-language environments,such as Mainland China, Hong Kong, and Taiwan. MuseScore's support is currently experimental.

Guitar Pro ( *.gtp, *.gp3, *.gp4, *.gp5, *.gpx) (import only)

GP files are created by Guitar Pro .

See also

Open/Save/Export/Print Recovered files

External links

How to recover a backup copy of a score

Fretboard diagrams

Note: This page applies to MuseScore 3.1 and above only. Users of versions prior to 3.1 should go toFretboard diagrams(prior to version 3.1).

Fretboard Diagrams overview

MuseScore allows the use and creation of fretboard (or chord) diagrams. They usually appear above the staff on leadsheets and piano scores. They are commonly used for guitar chords, but MuseScore permits the creation of diagrams forany instrument.

Below is a simple example of Fretboard Diagrams use.

186(Note: Fretboard Diagrams are an alternative to and quite different from Tablature, which is a specialized notation formthat is preferred by some string instrument players.)

The Fretboard Diagram mechanism can be used in several different ways.

1. Standard chords. A set of 21 common chord diagrams for the guitar are found in the Fretboard Diagramspalette in the Advanced Workspace. These consist of a single example of a major, minor, and seventh chord for each diatonic scale tone (CDEFGAB). These 21 chords are adequate for many simple pop or folk music scores. See the overview of this palette below.

2. Modified chords. In many cases, the standard chords from the Fretboard Diagrams palette are used as a starting point for creating modified chord diagrams, via the Inspector. This technique enables chord extensions, alterations, different voicings, different positions, etc. to be applied to the 21 standard diagrams. There are literally thousands of guitar chords in general use, making a comprehensive palette or dictionary impractical. See How to use Fretboard Diagrams for custom/complex chords for examples.

3. "Freehand" chords. More advanced guitarists often prefer to start from a blank chord grid, and then draw the specific chord tones desired. See How to use Fretboard Diagrams for custom/complex chords for examples.

Note: Many aspects of music notation follow well-established engraving standards. Guitar chord diagrams are anexception. Usage has varied widely from year to year, from publisher to publisher, from teacher to teacher, and fromarranger to arranger. Many inconsistent practices persist today, and distinct styles of chord notation are preferred indifferent musical genres and regions. For this reason, the MuseScore Fretboard Diagram interface supports diagrams ofvarious types. Users are free to choose their preferences.

Overview of the standard guitar chord palette

The Fretboard Diagrams palette in the Advanced Workspace provides 21 diagrams, comprising a single major, minor, andseventh chord for each diatonic scale tone (CDEFGAB). The name of each diagram appears when the cursor hovers overthe entry.

Note: This range of chord diagrams, or indeed any selection of 21 chords, would not typically be sufficient for publicationpurposes. Arrangers must consider many other voicings, positions, and chord qualities. This palette is also an example ofthe diverse diagram formats in use, as discussed above. These 21 chords happen to incorporate open/mute stringindicators (the X and O symbols above the diagrams). Although those symbolsdo often appear in published scores, theirusage varies by context. For example, jazz arrangements generally omit mute string indicators, unless contextuallyimportant, and rarely use open strings.

Additional palettes that contain a broader range of standard chords are expected be available in the future. These wouldtry to address the needs of specific musical genres and situations.

Overview of creating modified or custom chords

Modified Fretboard Diagrams are created by adding and then editing an existing diagram from the palette. By modifyingstandard chords, it is possible to create Fretboard Diagrams for any playable chord, and to reflect fingering on anyWestern fretted stringed instrument, regardless of tuning, number of strings, or number of frets. Most of the material belowdeals with the process of modifying diagrams and creating new ones.

Custom diagrams can be saved to a custom palette if desired for future use. Modified diagrams can of course becopied/pasted within a score in the usual ways.

187To add a Fretboard Diagram

To add a Fretboard Diagram to the score, use one of the following methods:

Select a note in voice 1 and double-click a Fretboard Diagram from thepalette.

Drag and drop a Fretboard Diagram from a palette to the desired position in the score.

As the cursor hovers over the chosen diagram within the palette, its name will appear as apop-up hint (see the examplein the overview).

Chord Symbols linked to Fretboard Diagrams

When adding a Fretboard Diagram to a score, a chord symbol is also automatically created. The chord symbol is normallyplaced above the diagram, and uses the chord name from the chord's palette cell. Automatic placement and formatting ofa diagram's chord symbol is controlled by style settings (see style settings, below).

A Fretboard Diagram's generated chord symbol can be selected, moved, and modified like any other text element. Itbehaves generally like the normal chord symbols that are added using Add→Text→Chord Symbol or the shortcut Ctrl+K.

Note 1: A field on the Chord Symbols style page (Style submenu: select Format→Style…→Chord symbols) – rather than onthe Fretboard Diagrams style page – controls the chord symbol's "Distance to Fretboard Diagram". This value interactswith the Element "Minimum distance" field, within the Inspector, to control automatic placement of the chord symbolrelative to the diagram. Note also that the Fretboard Diagram's "top edge" includes the blank space where open/mutestring indicators would appear, even if that area is empty. This may leave a larger gap than is desired. As usual, manualplacement can be used to override the automatic settings.

Note 2: Automatic chord symbols generated for Fretboard Diagrams are not completely integrated with normal ChordSymbols that may be directly associated with notes on the staff. Specifically, focus does not flow from a FretboardDiagram's chord symbol back to the sequence of other symbols on the page when using Space to move through the chordsymbols. This minor issue will be addressed in a future update.)

Use of Chord Symbols with Fretboard Diagrams

Add a diagram's Chord Symbol automatically simply be adding a Fretboard Diagram as described above. Delete a diagram's Chord Symbol by selecting the symbol and deleting it, as with any text item.

188 Add a new Chord Symbol to a diagram without oneby selecting the Fretboard Diagram and using Add→Text→Chord Symbol or the shortcut Ctrl+K .

The position of a Fretboard Diagram can be adjusted using the keyboard arrows inEdit mode; or with the X- and Y-offsets in the "Element" section at the top of the Inspector.

Visibility, Color and Stacking order can also be adjusted in the "Element" section: see the diagram underediting.

To adjust global/default Fretboard Diagram style properties

Certain default and global properties of Fretboard Diagrams (see diagram below) can be adjusted from theStylesubmenu: select Format→Style…→Fretboard Diagrams . Some of these properties are subject to override via theInspector; butmost affect all Fretboard Diagrams in the score.

Default vertical position specifies the default placement of the diagram relative to the staff. (Subject to override via Inspector). Scale specifies the default scale (i.e. diagram size). (Subject to override via Inspector). Fret number font size and ...position control placement of fret numbers on all diagrams. (Global). Barre line thickness controls how large a line is used to represent a barre on all diagrams. By default, this is the same thickness as the solid dots. A smaller line will allow dots to be visible under the barre, for situations where that is desirable. (Global). Relative dot size controls the size of dots on all diagrams, relative to the size of the scaled grid. (Global). String spacing controls the spacing between strings, and thus the total width of all diagrams. (Global). Fret spacing controls the spacing between frets, and thus the total height of all diagrams relative to the number of frets they each display. (Global).

Most Fretboard Diagram properties exposed by the Inspector offer "reset to style default" and "save as style default"buttons. These values do not typically appear on the style page, but are manipulated via the Inspector.

To edit a Fretboard Diagram

When a Fretboard Diagram is selected, it can be edited in theInspector as follows:

The Inspector displays three sections related to the Fretboard Diagram:

An Element section that controls the Fretboard Diagram's visibility, placement, color, and other aspects that are used in common with other MuseScore elements; see adjust element properties and the Inspector for details. A Fretboard Diagram section, with control fields and buttons that define the appearance of this diagram. A magnified version of the Fretboard Diagram, showing its details and allowing editing.

Below is an example of the Inspector with a Fretboard Diagram selected.

189Editing Fretboard Diagram properties

(See Inspector properties above in the editing example.)

To adjust the scale (size) of the diagram: Use Scale.

To adjust the diagram's placement relative to the staff: Use Placement. To adjust the number of instrument strings: Use Strings. Strings are added/removed from the left side of the diagram. To adjust how many frets to display (i.e. the height of the diagram): UseFrets. Frets are added/removed from the bottom of the diagram. To adjust the first fret position: Use Fret number. A digit is shown next to the first visible fret. To specify thickening of the nut (a heavy line above the first fret): Use Show nut. Place the finger dots as described below.

Finger dot editing (basic use)

(See Inspector properties above in the editing example.)

To remove all current dots, use the "Clear" button above the diagram. (Note: you could save a blank grid in a custom palette, as a starting point for custom diagrams.) To create a dot, click on a fret in the diagram at the bottom of the inspector; click again to remove the dot. To move a dot, clear its current position by clicking on it; then create the desired dot. To create a barre or partial barre: Click the "Barre" button above the diagram; then click at the leftmost position desired for the barre. The barre will extend to the right edge of the fretboard. Keyboard shortcut: Holding the Shift key, click on the string where you want a barre to begin. To end a barre before the rightmost string: Click the "Barre" button above the diagram; then click at the rightmost position desired on an existing barre. The barre will end at that string. Keyboard shortcut: Holding the Shift key, click on the string where you want a barre to end. To delete a barre: Click the "Barre" button above the diagram; then click at the leftmost position of the barre. It will be removed. Keyboard shortcut: Holding the Shift key, click on the leftmost position of the barre. To create multiple barres: Use the above steps to create one than one barre, e.g. to show the third finger covering

190 two strings. To adjust the barre thickness: Use the Style options (Format->Style->Fretboard Diagrams) to adjust the barre line thickness relative to the dots. This will allow dots to be visible on the barre, for cases where that is desired. To Indicate open and mute strings (optional). Click just above the diagram to toggle a string between: Open (o) Mute/unplayed (x) No indication

Finger dot editing (advanced use)

Some arrangers and educators use a more advanced form of Fretboard Diagram that a) incorporates multiple types of"dot", and that b) allows multiple dots per string.

This technique is particularly associated with the many books and arrangements published byTed Greene and hissuccessors. (Note: No other notation software currently supports this diagram style.)

Multi-dot notation style. With this approach, the round dots are played first. Then, on successive beats, the notes represented by the other dots are then played in order. This allows a single diagram to represent several beats of music. (The usual sequence is: dot→X→square→delta. Usage varies however.) Here are two examples of multi-dot diagrams.

Optional-note notation style. Another use of multiple dots per string allows other symbols to show optional notes, rather than delayed notes. Typically, a related chord voicing is shown, such as an optional extension or an optional rootless chord version. Here is an example of an optional extension.

MuseScore Fretboard Diagrams allow the creation of these and other types of multi-symbol diagrams. A chord is firstcreated and edited using the basic steps described above. Then, the multiple dot buttons above the diagram are used toadd secondary notes.

1. To begin adding multiple dots (i.e. symbols) to a diagram, click "Multiple dots". 2. To add another dot to a string, click above or below an existing symbol. The next symbol in sequence will be

191 placed at that position, e.g. if there is already a dot, an X will appear next. 3. To remove any symbol from a diagram, click on it. 4. To enter a particular symbol out of sequence, click on the button with that symbol before adding the dot; e.g. to enter an X on a string with no current dots, because that note should be played after the rest of the chord, click on the X and then place it as desired.

(Note: Experienced users of Ted Greene style diagrams will find that several secondary features from Ted's diagrams arenot yet supported in MuseScore. These include: a. Displaying the fret number on a higher fret than the first visible fret. b.Allowing the note symbols to include digits, not just the four dot styles currently supported. c. Allowing the creation ofannotation on and between diagrams, such as circling a particular note, or drawing lines linking notes in adjacentdiagrams. However, MuseScore does provide many tools for drawing and annotation that can serve in place of thesetechniques.)

(Note: Because multi-note symbols are not standardized, even within the Ted Greene community, users must be carefulto indicate how they are being used within a given score.)

External links

How to use Fretboard Diagrams for custom/complex chords

Fretboard diagrams (prior to version 3.1)

Note: This page applies to versions of MuseScore prior to 3.1 only. Users of MuseScore 3.1 and above should go toFretboard diagrams.

A range of fretboard (or chord) diagrams for the guitar are provided in the Fretboard Diagramspalette in the AdvancedWorkspace.

You can create a chord diagram for any fretted, stringed instrument by editing an existing one. It can be saved to a custompalette for future use if required.

Add a fretboard diagram

To add a fretboard diagram to the score, use one of the following methods:

Select a note in voice 1 and double-click a fretboard diagram from apalette.

Drag and drop a fretboard diagram from a palette to the desired position in the score.

As the cursor hovers over the chosen diagram within the palette, its name will appear as apop-up hint.

Edit a fretboard diagram

When a fretboard diagram is selected, it can be edited in the Inspector as follows:

To adjust the number of instrument strings: Use Strings.

To adjust the fret position number: Use Offset. To adjust how many frets to display (height-wise): UseFrets. To place the finger dots: Click on a fret to establish a dot; click again to remove the dot. To create a barre or partial barre: First make sure that the desired fret position is clear of black dots (click on a dot to remove it). Then, holding the Shift key, click on the string where you want the barre to begin. (Note: Only one barre can be applied per diagram; a partial barre must end on the first string). To delete a barre: Click on the black dot where the barre begins. To Indicate open and mute strings (if applicable): Click just above the diagram to toggle a string between: Open (o) Mute/unplayed (x)

192 No indication. To adjust the size: Use the Scale property.

To adjust a diagram's element properties

The position of a Fretboard Diagram can be adjusted using the keyboard arrows inEdit mode; or with the X- and Y-offsets in the "Element" section at the top of the Inspector.

Visibility, Color and Stacking order can also be adjusted from the "Element" section.

To adjust a diagram's style properties

Certain default and global properties of Fretboard Diagrams (e.g. barre thickness, vertical position, scale, fret-numberfont-size and position) can be adjusted from the Style submenu: select Format→Style…→Fretboard Diagrams . Some of theseproperties are subject to override via the Inspector; but most affect all Fretboard Diagrams in the score.

MIDI import

MuseScore can import MIDI files (.mid/.midi/.kar) and convert them into music notation.

To import a MIDI file, use the standard Open command. This converts the MIDI file into a MuseScore file using default settings.

The MIDI Import Panel appears at the bottom of the screen: you can expand this by dragging the interface with thedocument window upwards. The panel shows all the tracks in the file (only those with note events are shown) and allowsyou to adjust parameters affecting the conversion process. If there are multiple tracks, then one more track is added atthe top of the list to select all tracks at once.

To accept the default conversion: Simply press the "X" symbol on the top-left of the Import Panel to close it. The panel can be re-opened at any time during the session by pressing "Show MIDI import panel" at the bottom of the document window.

To reimport the file: Adjust the desired parameters in the Import Panel (seebelow) and press Apply. If you have made changes to the Import Panel but wish to UNDO them, press Cancel. To close the Import Panel, press the "X" symbol at the top-left of the panel.

Mouse wheel scrolling (MIDI Import Panel): Vertical scrolling is the default. For horizontal scrolling, pressShift or Ctrlwhile using the wheel.

However, the actual quantization grid size is adaptive and reduces when the note length is small, so for each note the quantization value is different. But there is an upper limit for the quantization value, and that value can be set by the user as "max. quantization". For example, if some note is long - say, half note, and the max. quantization is set to 8th, then the note will be quantized with the 8th-note grid, not the half- or quarter-note grid as it supposed to be by the algorithm. Such quantization scheme allows to quantize all notes in the score (with different lengths!) adequately.

193Max. voices Sets maximum count of allowed musical voices.Search tuplets When enabled, this option attempts to detect tuplets and applies the corresponding quantization grid to the tuplet chords.Is human performance If enabled, this option reduces the accuracy of MIDI-to-score conversion in favor of readability. It is useful for unaligned MIDI files, when no regular quantization grid is provided. For such files the automatic beat tracking algorithm is used which tries to detect the bar positions throughout the piece.2x less measure count The option is active for unaligned MIDI files (when "Is human performance" is checked by default). It halves measure count obtained in the internal beat tracking operation. It may be convenient when the beat tracking gives 2x more frequent bar subdivision than necessary.Time signature The option is active for unaligned MIDI files. The user can choose an appropriate time signature for the whole piece if the default detected value is wrong. The option is useful because it handles imported tuplets correctly unlike the direct time signature setting from the palette.Split staff This option is suited mainly for piano tracks - to assign notes to the left or right hand of the performer. It uses constant pitch separation (the user may choose the pitch via sub-options) or floating pitch separation (depending on the hand width - sort of a guess from the program point of view). For drum tracks (“Percussion” sound in the track list) it splits the staff into multiple staves, each of which gets only one drum pitch (i.e. drum sound). There is also a sub-option to allow/disallow the application of the square bracket for the newly created set of drum tracks.Clef changes Small clefs can be inserted within a staff to keep chords closer to the 5 staff lines. Clef changes depend on the average pitch of the chord. Tied groups of notes are not broken by the clef insertion (if it occurs, one can report a bug for algorithm in importmidi_clef.cpp). This option is available for non-drum tracks only.Simplify durations Reduces number of rests to form more "simple" note durations. For drum tracks this option can remove rests and lengthen notes as well.Show staccato Option to show/hide staccato markings in the score.Dotted notes Controls whether MuseScore will use dotted notes or ties.Show tempo text Shows/hides tempo text markings in the score.Show chord names Shows/hides chord names in the score, if any, for XF MIDI file format.Recognize pickup measure When enabled, this option doesn't change the time signature of the first bar that is shorter than the second bar. It is also called anacrusis. This option is only available for all tracks at once.Detect swing MuseScore tries to detect swing, and automatically replace a pattern of 4th + 8th notes in triplets (for the most common swing feel, 2:1), or a dotted 8th + 16th pattern (for shuffle, 3:1), with two straight 8ths and a “Swing” or “Shuffle” text at the beginning.

Master palette

The Master Palette is a repository of symbols used to populate theworkspaces (Basic, Advanced, and Custom). It is alsoused to create new Time Signatures and Key Signatures.

To open, use either of the following options:

Press Shift+F9 (Mac: fn+Shift+F9).

From the menu, select View → Master Palette.

194The Master palette is divided into sections based on symbol type. Hovering the mouse over an item shows atool tip (ashort definition in black on yellow background).

To transfer a Master palette item to a custom palette:

Drag the symbol from the Master Palette window into a custom palette.

Note: Except for the Symbols section (below), it is not usual to add items directly to the score from the Master palette: usethe workspace palettes instead. However, if desired, items can be added directly using either (i) drag-and-drop or (ii) byselecting one or more notes/rests and double-clicking the item.

Symbols

The Symbols section of the Master Palette is a large repository of hundreds of musical symbols in addition to those foundin the preset workspaces. You can open it from the Master Palette, or directly from the score by using the shortcutZ.

Find a symbol

The Symbols subcategories can be displayed by clicking on "Symbols". Use thefont menu on the bottom right of the boxto specify Emmentaler-, Gonville- or Bravura-specific symbols. You can search for a particular symbol by entering akeyword in the search box.

195Apply a symbol

To add an item to the score from the Symbols section, use any of the following options:

Drag and drop a symbol onto a staff.

Select a note or rest and double-click a symbol.

The position of the symbol can be adjusted by dragging or by changing the horizontal / vertical offsets in theInspector.Color and visibility can also be adjusted in the Inspector.

Note: Elements from the Symbols section do not follow any positioning rules (in many cases unlike identical elementsfrom other sections of the Master Palette), nor do they affect score playback.

Connect symbols

Elements from the Symbols section can be connected to each other on the score page, so that they can be moved as oneunit:

1. Apply first symbol to the score. Adjust position as required.

2. Double click, or drag-and-drop, a second element onto the first symbol. Adjust position as required.

Drag the first element and the attached element will follow.

See also

Palettes and workspaces

Symbols and special characters (add musical symbols to text objects)

Note input modes

MuseScore allows you to choose from any of several note input modes.Step-time (see below) is the default, but otherscan be accessed by clicking the small dropdown arrow next to the note entry button on the note input toolbar.

Step-time

This is the default method of note input and involves entering notes one at a time: first by selecting a note duration usingthe mouse or keyboard, then choosing a pitch using the mouse, keyboard, MIDI keyboard or virtual piano.

For details see Basic note entry.

Re-pitch

Re-pitch mode allows you to correct the pitches of a sequence of notes while leaving their durations unchanged (not to beconfused with Accidental: Respell pitches).

You can also use the Re-pitch function to create a new passage from an existing one of the same sequence of durations—by copying and pasting the latter, then applying Re-pitch.

196Rhythm

Rhythm mode allows you to enter durations with a single keypress. Combining Rhythm and Re-pitch modes makes for avery efficient method of note entry.

1. Select your starting point in the score and enter Rhythm mode. 2. Select a duration from the note input toolbar, or press a duration shortcut (numbers 1-9) on your computer keyboard. A note will be added to the score with the selected duration. In contrast to Basic note entry, pressing the . key will toggle dotting or not dotting all subsequent durations. All following rhythms will be dotted until the . key is pressed again. Unlike Basic note entry, the dot is to be pressed prior to entering the rhythm. 3. Entering rests is similar to adding dotted notes. Press the 0 key to toggle entering rests. All rhythms entered will be rests until the 0 key is pressed again. This can be used concurrently with dotted notes. 4. Continue pressing duration keys to enter notes with the chosen durations. 5. Now use Re-pitch mode to set the pitches of the notes you just added.

Real-time (automatic)

The Real-time modes basically allow you to perform the piece on a MIDI keyboard (or MuseScore'svirtual pianokeyboard) and have the notation added for you. However, you should be aware of the following limitations which currentlyapply:

It is not possible to use a computer keyboard for Real-time input

You cannot enter tuplets or notes shorter than the selected duration You cannot enter notes into more than one voice at a time

However, these restrictions mean that MuseScore has very little guessing to do when working out how your input shouldbe notated, which helps to keep the Real-time modes accurate.

In the automatic version of Real-time input, you play at a fixed tempo indicated by a metronome click. You can adjust thetempo by changing the delay between clicks from the menu: Edit → Preferences... → Note Input (Mac: MuseScore → Preferences...→ Note Input).

1. Select your starting position in the score and enter Real-time (automatic) mode. 2. Select a duration from the note input toolbar. 3. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key (a note will be added to the score). 4. Listen for the metronome clicks. With each click the note grows by the selected duration. 5. Release the key when the note has reached the desired length.

The score stops advancing as soon as you release the key. If you want the score to continue advancing (e.g. to allow youto enter rests) then you can use the Real-time Advance shortcut to start the metronome.

Real-time (manual)

In the manual version of Real-time input, you have to indicate your input tempo by tapping on a key or pedal, but you canplay at any speed you like and it doesn't have to be constant. The default key for setting the tempo (called "Real-timeAdvance") is Enter on the numeric keypad (Mac: fn+Return), but it is highly recommended that you change this to a MIDI keyor MIDI pedal (see below).

1. Select your starting position in the score and enter Real-time (manual) mode. 2. Select a duration from the note input toolbar. 3. Press and hold a MIDI key or virtual piano key (a note will be added to the score). 4. Press the Real-time Advance key. With each press the note grows by the selected duration. 5. Release the note when it has reached the desired length.

Real-time Advance shortcut

The Real-time Advance shortcut is used to tap beats in manual Real-time mode, or to start the metronome clicks inautomatic Real-time mode. It is called "Real-time Advance" because it causes the input position to more forward, or"advance", through the score.

197Alternatively, if you have a USB footswitch or computer pedal which can simulate keyboard keys, you could set it tosimulate Enter on the numeric keypad.

When the notes are entered they will be placed just before the selected starting element, which will be highlighted with asquare blue marker. The start element and any subsequent notes or rests within the same measure will be shiftedforward. You can move the insertion point forward and backward using the arrow keys → or ←, and the new insertion pointwill then be highlighted.

1. Make sure you are in Note input mode, and that you have the element selected where you want to start inserting notes/rests; 2. Click on the arrow next to the Note input icon, and selectInsert (or if Insert is the current default, just press N); 3. Enter a note or rest as you would in Step-Time mode. Each note is inserted before the current cursor position; 4. Move the cursor forward and backward if required (using the arrow keys), to change the insertion point.

Alternatively, if you have only one or two notes to insert, you may prefer to use a shortcut:

If, at any time, the total duration of the notes and rests within the measure does not match thetime signature, a small + or- sign will be shown above the measure.

See also: Remove selected range (Tools).

Normal mode

To leave Note Input mode, click on the Note Input tool button, pressN, or press Esc. This puts you in Normal mode, inwhich you can change durations and delete notes or rests as follows:

If you select a note and press Del the note will be replaced by a rest of the same duration. If you select a note or rest and press Ctrl+Del the note/rest will be deleted, and subsequent notes moved backward (see Remove selected range). If you reduce the duration of a note or rest the remaining duration will be filled with rests. If you increase the duration of a note or rest it will subtract duration from the subsequent notes/rests to make up the duration. If this is done on the last note/rest in the measure, a note or rest with the required duration will be inserted in the start of the following measure, and the two will be tied together.

See also

Note input Copy and paste

External links

Video: Semi-Realtime MIDI Demo Part 1: New note entry modes

Introduction to the new Repitch Mode (YouTube)

Notehead scheme

You can chose choose any one of nine notehead schemes for a standard staff. To set a notehead scheme:

Right-click on a staff and select Staff/Part Properties…; click on Advanced Style Properties… and chose from the "Notehead scheme" dropdown list.

The schemes are as follows:

198Normal: This is the default scheme and the one the vast majority of people will use: it is also the only scheme inMuseScore 1 and 2. It uses normal noteheads which can be changed via the Noteheads palette or the Inspector.Pitch name: Noteheads automatically and dynamically change to include the English pitch name in the notehead.

German pitch name: Just like the previous one but B will be replaced by H, and Bb by B.

Solfège Movable Do (also called Tonic Solfa) : Noteheads include the solfege syllable, depending on the degree inthe scale. It uses Ti and not Si.

Solfège Fixed Do : Noteheads include the solfege syllable for the note name. As used in France, Italy, Spain, etc...It uses Si and not Ti.

4 Shape (Walker): Noteheads follow the four-shape system used in books such as William Walker’sSouthernHarmony (1835).

7 Shape (Aikin): Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as Jesse B. Aikin’sThe ChristianMinstrel (1846), and books by the Ruebush & Kieffer Publishing Company. It's the most used 7-shape system.

7 Shape (Funk): Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as Joseph Funk’sHarmonia Sacra(1851).

7 Shape Walker: Noteheads follow the seven-shape system used in books such as William Walker’sChristianHarmony (1867).

199(For more info about the different variant of shape notes, see the SMuFL specification )

The setting applies to a given staff and the notehead will be used when entering and editing notes. Here is an example.

Noteheads

A range of alternative noteheads can be accessed via the Note Heads palette of the Advanced workspace, or theInspector (see Change notehead group, below).

Note: The design of the notehead may vary depending on the music font selected (Emmentaler, Gonville or Bravura).Those in the palette are displayed as half notes in Bravura font.

Notehead groups

MuseScore supports a range of notehead styles:

Normal: A standard notehead.

Crosshead (Ghost note): Used in percussion notation to represent cymbals. It also indicates muted and/or percussive effects in stringed instruments such as the guitar. Diamond: Used to indicate harmonic notes in instruments such as the guitar, violin etc. Slash: Used to notate rhythms (e.g. guitar strums). Triangle up/down: Used in percussion notation. Shape notes: Do, Re, Mi, Fa, Sol, La, Ti. Circle cross: Used in percussion notation. Circled noteheads Slashed notehead: A notehead with an oblique line through it. Plus noteheads Alt. Brevis: Used in early music notation. Brackets (Parentheses): applied around an existing note (or accidental).

Change notehead group

To change the shape of one or more noteheads in the score, use one of the following:

Select one or more notes and double click a notehead in a palette

Drag a notehead from a palette onto a note in the score. Select one or more notes and change the notehead in theInspector, using the drop-down list under Note → Head group (not supported for drum staves).

Change notehead type

Occasionally you may need to change the apparent duration of a notehead—i.e. notehead type—without altering itsactual, underlying duration:

When two notes in different voices, but of the same written pitch, fall on the same beat, one of two things may happen:

The notes may share the same notehead.

The notes may be offset: i.e. arranged side by side.

MuseScore uses the following rules:

Notes with stems in the same direction do not share noteheads.

Dotted notes do not share noteheads with undotted notes. Black notes do not share noteheads with white notes. Whole notes never share noteheads.

Note: If two unison notes occur in thesame voice they are always offset.

Change offset noteheads to shared

Offset noteheads can be turned into shared noteheads in one of two ways:

Make the smaller-value notehead invisible by selecting it and using the keyboard shortcutV (or unchecking the "Visible" option in the Inspector). Alter the notehead type of the shorter-duration note to match the longer one by switching "Head type" in the "Note" section of the Inspector: change the Head type from the default "Auto" to a specific duration.

Examples of notehead sharing

1. In the first example below, the notes of voices 1 and 2 share noteheads by default, because they are all black, undotted notes:

2. By contrast, in the next example, white notes cannot share noteheads with black notes, so are offset to the right:

To create a shared notehead, make the black eighth note invisible or change its head type to match that of the white note (as explained above):

201Remove duplicate fret marks

In certain cases, a shared notehead, when pasted to atablature staff, may result in two separate fret marks on adjacentstrings. To correct this, make any extraneous tablature notes invisible by selecting them and using the keyboard shortcutV (or by unchecking the "visible" option in the Inspector).

External links

Shape notes at Wikipedia.

Ghost notes at Wikipedia.

Parts

MuseScore allows you to not only create and print a full score but also to generate individual player'sparts from it.

A part can be created from a specific instrument staff in the main score or even from a specificvoice within a staff. Thisallows you to display multiple parts (e.g. Flute 1 & 2) on a single staff in the score but to extract them as separate parts.

Create all parts

The most straightforward method is to create all parts at once. Parts are generated on a one-to-one basis from thecorresponding Instruments in the score:

1. From the menu, select File → Parts....

2. Click the New All button (parts are named with the instrument name, and a number added to differentiate parts that have the same label in the main score).

3. Click OK.

The parts can now be accessed by clicking on tabs above the document window.

202Create specific parts

This method allows you to generate specific parts for only selected instruments (rather than all-at-once):

1. In the Parts window click New to create a part;

2. In the center pane, type the words you want to use for the "Part title" (this also serves for the corresponding part of the filename when exporting); 3. Pick the instrument that you want to appear in your part from the "Instruments in score" pane, and press+ to add it to the "Instruments in part" pane.

If you wish to create more parts, repeat steps 1 through 3 (above) for each part.

4. Click OK to save the parts.

You have now finished setting up the parts. You do not need to do this again, unless you add or remove an instrumentfrom your full score.

Customize parts

Once you have generated a part (or all parts), you can select any part at the top and use the controls at the bottom tocontrol not only what instrument is in the part, but also which staves and voices within the instrument are included.

Add instruments to a part

To add instruments to an existing part:

1. Select the part in the "Parts" pane.

2. Select the instrument from the "Instruments in score" pane. 3. Press + to add it to the "Instruments in part" pane.

Remove instruments from a part

To remove instruments from an existing part:

1. Select the part in the "Parts" pane.

2. Select the instrument from the "Instruments in part" pane. 3. Press - to remove the instrument.

Select staves for an instrument

203To select the staves of an instrument to include in the part:

1. Select the part in the "Parts" pane.

2. Click the arrow next to the instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. 3. Select the staff to be removed. 4. Press - to remove it from the instrument.

Select voices for an instrument

1. Select the part in the "Parts" pane.

2. Click the arrow next to the instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. 3. Uncheck the voices to be removed.

Note: If you select only voice 1 for a given staff, then only the content in voice 1 for that staff will be included in the part.Thus, in order to share flute 1 & 2 on the same staff, you will need to enter all notes onto both voices, even in passageswhere they share content. You also cannot enter the two parts as chords in the passages where they share rhythms.

Delete a Part

1. Open the Parts dialog (File → Parts...);

2. Select the relevant Part in the "Parts" pane; 3. Press Delete .

Export parts

1. From the menu, select File → Export Parts... ;

2. Navigate to the place you want them to be exported to and select the file format (PDF is the default); 3. For filename just enter whatever prefix is useful for all parts, or leave the default (the filename of your score); 4. Click OK.

This will generate files with the names "<title>" + "-" + "<part name>.<extension>". In addition, when exporting as PDF,this will also generate "<title>" + "-Score_And_Parts.pdf".

Save parts

Parts and score are "linked", which means that any change to the content in one will affect the other, but changes to thelayout will not. When you have the parts created, they are saved along with the score (if you open the score you havetabs for the score and every part you created).

However, if you wish to save a part individually:

1. Make sure the part is "active." Select its tab if not;

2. From the menu, select File → Save As... .

Print a part

1. Make sure the part is "active." Select its tab if not;

2. From the menu, select File → Print to open the print dialog.

Plugins

What are Plugins?

Plugins are small pieces of software that add a particular feature to MuseScore. By enabling a plugin, a new menu optionis appended to the Plugins menu: subsequently, when this option is selected, the plugin performs a particular task in thescore.

Some plugins come pre-installed with MuseScore—see Plugins installed by default (below). You can find many moreplugins in the plugin repository : some work with MuseScore 3, others only with older versions of MuseScore, and somework with either. To tell one from the other: MuseScore 3.x and 2.x plugin code files have an extension of .qml ; for olderversions, it is .js.

204Installation

Note: Some plugins may require the installation of other components (fonts, e.g.) to work. Check the plugin'sdocumentation for more information.

Most plugins are provided as ZIP archives: download the plugin's .zip file and uncompress (unzip) it to one of thedirectories mentioned below (depending on your OS). If the plugin is provided directly as an uncompressed .qml file,simply download it and place into one of the same directories.

Once a plugin is installed, it needs to be enabled in thePlugin Manager in order to use it—see Enable/disable Plugins.

New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add newplugins to %HOMEPATH%\Documents\MuseScore3\Plugins; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins inMuseScore's Preferences.

macOS

On macOS, MuseScore looks for pre-installed plugins in the MuseScore bundle in/Applications/MuseScore3.app/Contents/Resources/plugins (to reveal files in the app bundle, right click on MuseScore 3.app and choose "Show packagecontents"), and in ~/Library/Application Support/MuseScore/MuseScore 3/plugins .

New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add newplugins to ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Plugins ; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins in MuseScore'sPreferences.

Linux

In Linux, MuseScore looks for plugins in /usr/share/mscore-3.0/plugins and in ~/.local/share/data/MuseScore/MuseScore 2/plugins.

New plugins should not be installed in the above folders, and neither should the folders be modified. Instead add newplugins to ~/Documents/MuseScore3/Plugins ; alternatively, specify a different folder to look for plugins in MuseScore'sPreferences.

Enable/disable plugins

To be able to access the installed plugins from the Plugins menu, they need to be enabled in thePlugin Manager:

You do this simply by checking the appropriate tick box. This adds the name of the plugin to the list in thePlugins menu.

205Create/edit/run plugins

It is possible to create new or edit existing plugins and run them via thePlugin Creator:

Documentation of all available elements can also be found here.

Plugins installed by default

Some plugins come pre-installed with MuseScore, but they are not enabled by default. SeeEnable/disable plugins(above) to enable plugins.

ABC Import

This plugin imports ABC text from a file or the clipboard and converts it toMusicXML. Internet connection is required,because it uses an external web-service for the conversion.

Notes → Color Notes

This demo plugin colors notes in the selected range (or the entire score), depending on their pitch. It colors the note headof all notes in all staves and voices according to the Boomwhackers convention. Each pitch has a different color. C and C♯have a different color. C♯ and D♭ have the same color.To color all the notes in black, just run that plugin again (on the same selection). You could also use the 'Remove NotesColor' plugin for this.

Create Score

This demo plugin creates a new score. It creates a new piano score with 4 quarter notes: C, D, E, F. It's a good start tolearn how to make a new score and add notes from a plugin.

helloQml

This demo plugin demonstrates some basic tasks.

Notes → Note Names

This plugin names notes in a selected range or for the entire score. It displays the names of the notes (asstaff text)according to MuseScore's language settings: voices 1 and 3 notes above the staff; voices 2 and 4 notes below the staff;and chord notes in a comma separated list, starting with the top note.

Panel

This demo plugin creates a GUI panel.

random/random2

Creates a random score.

run

206This demo plugin runs an external command. Probably this will only work on Linux.

scorelist

This test plugin iterates through the score list.

ScoreView

Demo plugin to demonstrate the use of a ScoreView

Walk

This test plugin walks through all elements in a score

See also

Tools

External links

Plugins for 3.x

Preferences

You can customize many of MuseScore's default behaviors via the menu:Edit→Preferences... (Mac: MuseScore→Preferences...).

The Preferences dialog has multiple tabs:

will reset all preferences to the ones MuseScore had when you installed it.Ok will save theReset All Preferences to Defaultsettings and close the dialog. Cancel will close the dialog without applying changes. Apply will make changes take effectwithout closing the dialog.

General

207Here you can define:

Program Start: Tick the boxes as appropriate to specify whichscore and what panels (Play Panel, Navigator, Start Center) you want to see when MuseScore opens. Also select ifTours will be active. Folders: Specify the default folders for score files,style files, custom score templates, plugins, additional SoundFonts and images. Language: Chose the language used by the program. Translations may be updated from here too. Note that language translation updates can also be done via the menu: Help→Resource Manager . Theme: Specify a dark or light theme and the size of icons. Icon width / Icon height Font / Font size Auto Save: How frequently the program autosaves. OSC Remote Control

Canvas

Use Canvas to set your preferred color and wallpaper for the score background and paper. The default "Background" isgrey (RGB 221, 221, 221; Alpha 221) and the default "Paper," white.

Background: Use this to set the color or backgroundaround the score pages. Select "Color" then click on the bar to the right and make a choice from the color picker; or select "Wallpaper," click on the file icon and set a background image. Paper: Sets the color or background of the score pages. Controls identical to "Background" (above). Scroll Pages: This defines the way that the pages are laid out in the score. Chose "Horizontally" for a row layout, or "Vertically" for a column layout. Miscellaneous: "Draw antialiased" (the default option) makes diagonal lines and edges of shapes look smoother. "Proximity for selecting elements" controls the distance the mouse may be from an object and still act on it. Smaller numbers require more precision, making it harder to click on small objects. Larger numbers are less precise, making it harder not to click on nearby objects unintentionally. Choose a comfortable working value.

Note input

208On this tab there are note input and MIDI remote control preferences. Here the following can be set:

Note Input

Enable MIDI Input: Leave checked to allow MIDI input of notes.

Color notes outside of usable pitch range: For details, see Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range and Usable pitch range (Staff properties: all staves). Delay between notes in automatic real-time mode: See Real-time (automatic). Play notes when editing: When ticked, MuseScore sounds the note when it is entered or selected. Tick "Play whole chord when adding note," if you want to hear all the notes of a chord when it is added to. You can also edit the "Default duration".

MIDI Remote Control

Midi Remote Control allows you to use certain keys on your MIDI keyboard to enter notes and restsand to select notedurations, without involving the computer mouse or (computer) keyboard. The default setting is off.

To assign a command to a MIDI key:

1. Ensure that "MIDI Remote Control" is checked (your MIDI keyboard should be connected before opening the program). 2. Click the red button next to the option you wish to assign a MIDI key to: the red button now lights up. 3. Press a MIDI keyboard key. The red button becomes unlit and the green button lights up instead. The MIDI key has now been assigned to the desired option. 4. Repeat "2" and "3" to assign other keys.

Once you have defined your key settings you can use the MIDI keyboard to control note input operations. You can verifyyour key settings by observing the MuseScore Note Input toolbar while pressing the MIDI keys.

Notes: (1) The "Clear" option turns off all the green buttons for the current MuseScore session but all the user-recordedMIDI key settings are retained and will be reloaded on the next session. (2) A MIDI key setting that is activated cannotafterwards be turned off, and the green button will always remain lit: however it can be overwritten with a different MIDIkey by using the red button again. (3) If the same MIDI key is accidentally assigned to more than one option, then all theassociated green buttons remain lit although only one will work. To fix, see "(2)".

209Score

Score preferences include

Default instrument list files (two may be selected)

Default style for score and parts (see Load/Save Style) Default zoom

I/O

API / Device

210This enables you to set the audio interface (API) and specify the device to be used for audio playback: e.g. built-inspeakers/headphones, USB headset, wireless, etc.

MIDI Input/Output/Output Latency

When an external MIDI input device is connected, its identifier appears inMIDI Input. When the device is connected forthe first time, you also need to select the correct MIDI Output option in order to enable note input and correct audioplayback (e.g. in Windows, this might be "MMS<device name>"): then close and reopen the program to confirm thechanges.

Jack Audio Server

Check these options as required if using the JACK Audio Connection Kit.

Import

These settings determine how files from other sources are imported:

Using either the built in MuseScore style or a style you choose (seeLoad/Save Style) Guitar Pro and Overture character sets MusicXML layout options Shortest note in MIDI files

Export

211These settings determine how various files are exported from MuseScore:

PNG: PNG/SVG image resolution (in DPI) and whether to use transparent background. MIDI: Whether to expand repeats in exported MIDI files. Audio: Set audio sample rate, MP3 bitrate, and whether to normalize exported audio. MusicXML: Whether to export the layout and how to export system and page breaks to MusicXML.

Shortcuts

Every action possible with MuseScore is listed, with the associated shortcut if it exists. To define a new shortcut, select anexisting entry in the list and click Define... (or just double click the entry), then enter the new shortcut using up to four keys.You can also reset any shortcut in the list to its default value, or clear a shortcut you select. Shortcuts listed in preferences

212appear next to their associated commands in the menus.

Note: Some shortcuts, including default ones, may not work with some keyboards.

You may Save the list of shortcuts to a file of your own choice, and Load it later, making it easy to work with differentshortcut settings for different purposes.The list of shortcuts can be printed out or exported to other media (pdf etc.) using the Print button in the bottom right of thewindow.

Update

This sets whether MuseScore will check for updates and extensions at startup.

Updates may be checked manually in Help→Check for updates .

Advanced

213Allows you to control specific settings for "application, "export", "i/o" and "user interface", as well as color settings for thePiano Roll Editor.

If MuseScore or your computer should crash, or if power is lost, a pop-up message upon restarting MuseScore will ask ifyou wish to restore the previous session:

Click Yes, to initiate attempted recovery of files from the interrupted session. Or clickNo to ignore message.

Saving after session recovery

When MuseScore recovers files after a crash, it renames them with the full path name added in front of the original filename. This very long name will appear in the tab(s) above the active score window.

To ensure that the file is saved in its original location. You should immediately save the restored file using the"Save As..."option: this will open a window to allow you to navigate to the correct folder and directory. If you use the "Save" commandinstead, the file will be saved in its current location which is unlikely to be the original one.

Finding recovered files

In the event that "Save" is used instead of "Save As..." with a recovered file, you will have to find the files in your computer.The actual location of those files will vary, depending on your operating system, and in which directory MuseScore is

214installed.

For Windows 7, with a default installation of MuseScore to the x86 program files directory, recovered files are auto-savedto C:\Program Files (x86)\MuseScore 2\bin (actually %ProgramFiles(x86)%\MuseScore 2\bin).

You may need to run a system-wide search in order to find files saved directly after a session recovery. Use keywordsfrom the original file name as well as wildcards, and specify the date modified.

See also

Save/Export/Print

External links

How to recover a backup copy of a score

Score Comparison

The Score Comparison Tool allows you to compare two versions of a score to find the differences between them.

Introduction

To open the Score Comparison Tool:

From the menu, select View→Score Comparison Tool .

The dialog opens below the document window and consists of three sections (left to right):

Chose scores to compare: Select the scores you want to compare.

Diff mode: Select how to view the comparison. Comparison: A line by line comparison of the scores is displayed.

Select score

The first step is to select the score. Use the combo box next to "Score 1" to choose between the currently open scores, orclick on the Browse button to open the File Explorer and select a score from disk. Secondly, use the next combo box on theright to choose whether the first score should be the current version, or the last saved version. Score 2 is set to the samescore you selected for Score 1, but you may choose another of the open scores.

When you have selected the scores and versions press Compare to do the comparison.

Choose view

"Intelligent comparison" is the default option in Diff mode: this displays the differences between the scores in a human-readable format (e.g. "Measure 1: Note: property pitch changed from B4 to C5"). Change the Diff Mode selection to "Raw"if you prefer to see the results displayed in XML code.

View comparison

When you press Compare a list of differences will be displayed to the right, and the score view will automatically change to

215Documents Stacked. In the Comparison section, double-click on a difference from the list and both score views willautomatically pan to show you the changed element, which will also be highlighted.

Leave comparison

To exit the Score Comparison tool, turn off the two options "Score Comparison Tool"and "Documents Stacked" in the Viewmenu.

Example

Below you will see two small scores with a few differences between them.

The result of the comparison will look like this:

1. Make sure that the applicable score or instrument part is the active tab; 2. From the menu, select File → Score Properties.

Several meta tags are generated automatically when you create a score using theNew Score Wizard, and others may beadded later. Meta tags can also be incorporated into a header or footer if required—see below.

Edit meta tags

1. Make sure that the applicable score or instrument part is the active tab; 2. From the menu, select File → Score Properties;

216 3. Edit the text of the various meta tags as required; 4. To add another meta tag, click on the New button. Fill in the "New tag name" field and pressOK;

Pre-existing meta tags

Every score displays the following fields in Score Properties:

File Path: The score file's location on your Computer.

MuseScore Version: The version of MuseScore the score was last saved with. Revision: The revision of MuseScore the score was last saved with. API-Level: The file format version. arranger: (empty) composer: This is initially set to the same text as "Composer" on the first page of theNew Score Wizard. copyright: This is initially set to the same text as "Copyright" on the first page of theNew Score Wizard. creationDate: Date of the score creation. This could be empty, if the score was saved in test mode (seeCommand line options). lyricist: This is initially set to the same text as "Lyricist" on the first page of theNew Score Wizard. movementNumber: (empty) movementTitle: (empty) originalFormat: This tag exists only if the score is imported (seefile formats). platform: The computing platform the score was created on. This might be empty if the score was saved in test mode. poet: (empty) source: May contain a URL if the score was downloaded from orsaved to MuseScore.com. translator: (empty) workNumber: (empty) workTitle: This is initially set to the same text as "Title" on the first page of theNew Score Wizard.

Entering Work / Movement / Part metadata

workNumber is the number of the larger work (e.g. 8—for "The Four Seasons," Op. 8, by Vivaldi). workTitle is the title of the larger work (e.g "The Four Seasons,"). movementNumber is the number of the movement in the larger work (e.g. 3 for Autumn). movementTitle is the title of the movement in the larger work (e.g.“Autumn”).

It is customary, when using the New Score Wizard, to create a work with themovementTitle as title (even though it ends

217up in workTitle then) and, directly after creating the score, amending this information in the Score Properties dialogue.

Every part additionally has the following meta tag, generated and filled on part creation:

partName: The name of the part as given on part creation (which is also used to fill the corresponding part name text in the top vertical frame—be aware that later changes to one are not reflected in the other).

Header/Footer

To show the content of one or more meta tags in a header or footer for your score/part:

1. Make sure that the correct score or instrument part is the active tab; 2. From the menu, select Format → Style... → Header, Footer :

If you hover with your mouse over the Header or Footer text region, a list of macros will appear, showing their meaning, as well as the existing meta tags and their content.

3. Add tags (e.g. $:workTitle:) and macros (e.g. $M) to the appropriate boxes, as required; 4. Click Apply to see how the header or footer looks in the score. Make corrections to the dialog if required; 5. If an instrument part is in the active tab, click Apply to all parts , if you want to apply these settings to all the score parts; 6. Click OK to assign the header or footer and exit the dialog.

Staff / Part properties

The Staff / Part Properties dialog allows you to make changes to the display of astaff, adjust its tuning andtransposition, change instrument etc. To open:

Right-click on a staff and select Staff/Part Properties....

Staff / Part Properties dialog, as of version 3.0.

Staff Types

For practical purposes, there are four different types of staff:

1a. Standard staff I. A pitched staff used for most instruments except fretted, plucked-string ones.1b. Standard staff II. A pitched staff containing a fretted, plucked-string instrument, with options to set the number ofinstrument strings and tuning.2. Tablature staff. A staff containing a fretted, plucked-string instrument, which displays music as a series of fret-marks onstrings. Also contains options to set the number of instrument strings and tuning.3. Percussion staff. A pitched staff for percussion instruments.

It is possible to change one type of staff into another using theInstruments dialog, as long as the original staff is loadedwith the right instrument. For example, in order to change a standard staff to tablature, it must contain a plucked-stringinstrument. Similarly, to change a standard staff to a percussion staff you need to ensure that it has an appropriatepercussion instrument loaded and so on.

Most options in the Staff / Part properties dialog are common to all staves, but each type also has one or two specificoptions of its own.

Staff / Part Properties: all staves

The following Staff Properties options are common to all staves:

LinesThe number of lines making up the staff.

219Line DistanceThe distance between two staff lines, measured in spaces (abbr.: sp.). Note: It is not recommended to change this valuefrom the default shown. If you need to make the staff larger or smaller, use the Page Settings dialog instead.

Extra distance above staff

Increases or decreases the distance between the selected staff and the one above in all systems. Note: This setting doesnot apply to the top staff of a system, which is controlled by the minimum/maximum system distance (see Layout andformatting: Format → Style … → Page).

Alternatively, you can alter the "Extra distance above staff" directly from the score page:1. Press and hold the Shift key.2. Click on an empty space in a staff and drag it up or down with the mouse.

Notes: To alter the spacing above just one staff line in a particular system, see Breaks and Spacers.

ScaleChanges the size of the selected staff and all associated elements, as a percentage (to adjust theoverall score size, useScaling from the Format→Page Settings… menu).

Hide when empty

Together with the "Hide empty staves" setting in Format → Style ... → Score, this determines if the staff will be hiddenwhen it is empty.

Possible values:

Auto (default): The staff will be hidden if it is empty and "Hide empty staves" is set. Always: The staff will be hidden when empty, even if "Hide empty staves" is not set. Never: The staff will never be hidden when empty. Instrument: For instruments containing multiple staves, the staff is hidden only if all staves for that instrument are empty.

Show clefWhether the staff clef will be shown.

Show time signature

Whether the staff time signature(s) will be shown or not.

Show barlinesWhether the staff barlines will be shown.

Hide system barline

Show/hide barline at left-hand edge of the staff.

Do not hide if system is empty

Never hide this staff, even if the entire system is empty. This overrules any "Hide empty staves" setting in Format → Style... → Score.

Small staffCreate a reduced-size staff. You can set the default from the menu in Format → Style ... → Sizes.

Invisible staff lines

Make staff lines invisible.

Staff line color

Use a color picker to change the color of the staff lines.

CutawayUsed to create a cutaway staff in which only measures containing notes are visible (e.g. ossias (Wikipedia); or cutawayscores). This can be used independently of "Hide when empty" or "Hide empty staves".

InstrumentThe instrument loaded in the Instruments (I) or Select Instrument dialog. The sound associated with this instrument canbe changed, if desired, in the Mixer.

Part nameThe name of the part. This is also displayed in the Mixer and the Instruments dialog (I).

220Long instrument nameName displayed to the left of the staff in the first system of the score. The long instrument name may also be editeddirectly as a text object (see Text editing).

Short instrument name

Name displayed to the left of the staff in subsequent systems of the score. The short instrument name may also be editeddirectly as a text object (see Text editing). Editing affects all occurrences in the score.

Usable pitch range

Amateur: Notes outside this range will be colored olive green/dark yellow in the score. Professional: Notes outside this range will be colored red in the score.

See also, Coloring of notes outside an instrument's range.

Transpose written pitches to sound

This option ensures that the staves of transposing instruments display music at the correct written pitch. Set the transposein term of a musical interval (plus octave if required) up or down.

Navigation arrowsUse the ↑ and ↓ buttons, at the bottom left of the Staff Properties window, to navigate to the previous or next staff.

Staff / Part Properties: plucked strings only

Staves of fretted, plucked-string instruments have a few extra options in addition to those listedabove,

Number of stringsDisplays the number of instrument strings.

Edit String Data…

This button opens a dialog box which allows you to set the number and tuning of strings. See Change string tuning.

Advanced Style Properties

Clicking the Advanced Style Properties... button opens a window giving access to advanced display options for the staff. Thesewill vary depending on the staff type chosen: see the relevant sections below for details.

Template

At the bottom of the Advanced Style Properties dialog there are a number of buttons which allow you to easily change thefollowing:

The number of lines displayed by a percussion staff.

The staff type of a plucked-string instrument. For example, you can change from standard staff to tablature and vice versa, or select from a number of tablature options.

1. Make a selection from the drop-down list labelled "Template";

2. Press < Reset to Template ; 3. Press OK to accept the changes and exit the dialog (orCancel to cancel the operation).

Standard and Percussion staff options

Show clef / time signature / barlines / key signature / ledger lines

Option to turn the display of these elements ON or OFF.

StemlessIf checked, staff notes will have no stem, hook or beam.

Notehead schemeSee Notehead scheme.

Tablature staff options

221Upside downIf not checked, the top tablature line will refer to the highest string, and the bottom tablature line to the lowest string (this isthe most common option). If checked, the top tablature line refers to the lowest string, and the bottom tablature line to thehighest line (e.g. Italian-style lute tablatures). For example:

'Upside down' tablature.

Tablature staff options: Fret Marks

Fret marks are the numbers or letters used to indicate the location of notes on the fingerboard. The following group ofproperties define the appearance of fret marks:

SizeFont size of fret marks in typographic points. Built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 9-10pt.

Vertical offsetMuseScore tries to place symbols in a sensible way and you do not usually need to alter this value (set to 0) for built-infonts. If the font has symbols not aligned on the base line (or in some other way MuseScore does not expect), thisproperty allows you to move fret-marks up (negative offsets) or down (positive offsets) for better vertical positioning.Values are in sp.

Marks areChoice of Numbers (‘1’, ‘2’...) or Letters (‘a’, ‘b’...) as fret marks. When letters are used, ‘j’ is skipped and ‘k’ is used forthe 9th fret.

Marks are drawn

Choice of placing fretmarks On lines or Above lines. For example:

Fretmark letters placed above line.

Lines areChoice of Continuous (lines pass through fret marks) or Broken (a small space appears in the line where the fretmark isdisplayed). For example:

Tablature with lines broken.

Show back-tied fret marks

If unticked, only the first note in a series of tied notes is displayed. If ticked, all notes in the tied series are displayed.

Show fingering in tablature

Tick to allow the display of fingering symbols applied from a palette.

Tablature staff options: Note Values

222This group of properties defines the appearance of the symbols indicating note values.

FontThe font used to draw the value symbols. Currently 5 fonts are provided supporting all the necessary symbols in 5different styles (modern, Italian tablature, French tablature, French baroque (headless), French baroque). Used only withthe Note symbols option.

SizeFont size, in typographic points. Built-in fonts usually look good at a size of 15pt. Used only with the Note symbols option.

None: No note value will be drawn (as in the examples above)

Note symbols: Symbols in the shape of notes will be drawn above the staff. When this option is selected, symbols are drawn only when the note value changes, without being repeated (by default) for a sequence of notes all of the same value. E.g.

Stems and beams: Note stems and beams (or hooks) will be drawn. Values are indicated for each note, using the same typographic devices as for a regular staff; all commands of the standard Beam Palette can be applied to these beams too. E.g.

Repeat:

If several notes in sequence have the same duration, you can specify if and where to repeat the same note symbol. i.e.

Never At new system At new measure Always

Note: This option is only available if "Shown as: Note symbols" is selected (see above).

Stem style:

Beside staff: Stems are drawn as fixed height lines above/below the staff. Through staff: Stems run through the staff to reach the fret marks.

Note: This option is only available when "Shown as: Stems and Beams" is selected (see above).

Stem position:

Above: Stems and beams are drawn above the staff.

Below: Stems and beams are drawn below the staff.

Note: This option is only available when "Shown as: Stems and Beams" and "Stem style: Beside staff" is selected (seeabove).

Half notes:

None As short stems As slashed stems

223Note: This option is only available when "Shown as: Stems and Beams and "Stem style: Beside staff" is selected (seeabove).

Show restsWhether note symbols should be used to indicate also the rests; when used for rests, note symbols are drawn at a slightlylower position. Used only with the Note symbols option.

Preview

Displays a short score in tablature format with all the current parameters applied.

Change instrument

You can change any instrument in a score to a different instrument at any time. The following method updates instrumentsound, staff name, and staff transposition all at once.

1. Right-click on an empty part of any measure OR on the instrument name and choose Staff Properties... ; 2. Click on Change Instrument... (under "Part Properties"); 3. Choose your new instrument and click OK to return to the Staff Properties dialog; 4. Click OK again to return to the score.

Not to be confused with Mid-staff instrument change.

External links

How to turn a staff into an ossia .

Staff Type Change

You can change the appearance of a staff mid-score by adding aStaff type change element to a measure, and adjustingits properties in the Inspector.

Add a Staff Type Change

1. Select a measure in the score and, in the "Text"palette, double-click the "Staff type change" symbol, ; alternatively, drag the "Staff type change" icon onto a measure; 2. Select the symbol, and adjust its properties (see below) in theInspector as required.

Staff type change properties

When you alter a Staff type change property in the Inspector, the new value takes precedence over the value shown inthe global Staff properties dialog. Only those property values in "Staff Properties" that cannot be changed in the "Stafftype change" dialog will be valid throughout the score.

The properties that can be altered in the Staff type change dialog in the Inspector are:

OffsetHow far the changed staff shall be moved up or down: measured in spaces (abbr.: sp) .

SmallTick the box to create a reduced-size staff.

ScaleChanges the size of the staff and all associated elements, as a percentage.

LinesThe number of lines making up the staff.

Line distanceThe distance between two staff lines, measured in spaces (abbr.: sp).

Step offsetHow many steps up or down the notes in the staff are offset.

224Show barlinesWhether the staff barlines will be shown.

Show ledger lines

Whether ledger lines will be shown for notes above/below the staff lines.

Slash styleWhether the notes shall be shown in standard or slash style.

Notehead schemeAllows selection of how noteheads are displayed.

Generate clefsWhether the staff clef will be shown.

Generate time signatures

Whether the staff time signature(s) will be shown or not.

Generate key signatures

Whether the staff key signatures will be shown or not.

Example

To illustrate the use of Staff type change, the staff shown below was created using the following steps:

1. Add a Staff type change to measure 2.

2. Set size to "Small". 3. Set "Lines" to 4. 4. Add a second Staff Type Change to measure 3.

5. Change "Lines" to 7,

Afterwards the global Staff Properties are changed using Staff properties:

1 Set "Lines" to 2.2. Change "Staff Line Color".

As can be seen, the change in "Lines" is only effective up to the first staff type change, whereas the change to "Staff LineColor" is effective throughout the score.

Timeline

Introduction

The timeline was developed as part of the Google Summer of Code 2017, and is included for the first time in MuseScore3.0.

Overview

The timeline is a navigation tool that displays an abstraction of the score to the order of measure numbers and instrumentnames. There are four parts to the timeline:

Meta labels

225This is found in the top left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the meta rows.

Instrument labels

This is found in the bottom left corner of the timeline. These are the names of the rows in the main grid.

Meta rows

This is found in the top right corner of the timeline. These hold the meta values of the score.

Main grid

This is found in the bottom right corner of the timeline. This holds multiple 'cells' (a specific measure and staff in the scorerepresented as a square)

Meta

Meta are elements found on the score that are not notes, but are still important to the score (key signature, timesignature, tempo, rehearsal marks, bar lines, and jumps and markers).

Basic interaction

Select a measure

To select a measure in the timeline, press the mouse button on the cell. A blue box will appear around the selected celland the respective measure in the score will be selected. The score view will place the selected measure in view.

Select multiple measures

Drag selection

Holding Shift and holding the left mouse button and dragging the mouse over the main grid will create a selection box.Upon releasing the mouse button, all the cells underneath the selection box will be selected, as well as all the measures inthe score.

[Shift] selection

If a cell is already selected, holding Shift and selecting another cell in the timeline will stretch the selection to that new cell,similar to how the score does

[Ctrl] selection

If no cells are currently selected, holding Ctrl and selecting a cell will select the entire measure

Clearing selection

To clear selection, holding Ctrl and clicking anywhere on the grid or the meta rows will clear any current selection.

Meta values selection

Selecting the meta values on the timeline will attempt to select the respective meta values in the score.

Scrolling

Standard scrolling

Scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and instrument labels down or up respectively. The meta labelsand rows do not move.

226[Shift] scrolling

Holding Shift and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively. Themeta labels and instrument labels do not move.

[Alt] scrolling

Holding Alt and scrolling the mouse wheel up or down will move the grid and meta rows left or right respectively, fasterthan Shift scrolling. The meta labels and instrument labels do not move.

Dragging

To drag the contents of the timeline, hold the left mouse button and move it around.

Labels interaction

Rearranging meta labels

All meta labels besides the measures meta may be rearranged in any way. By moving the mouse cursor onto one of themeta labels, small up and down arrows will appear. Click the left mouse button on the up arrow to swap the meta labelwith the one above it. Click the left mouse button on the down arrow to swap the meta label with the one below it.

Collapsing the meta labels

In order to hide all the meta labels while keeping all the meta information on the timeline, there is an arrow that appears onthe measures meta when the mouse is over it. Click the left mouse button on the large up arrow to collapse all thecurrently visible meta rows into one row, where the meta values are staggered in that row. Click the left mouse button onthe large down arrow to expand the meta rows again.

Hiding instruments

All instruments--hidden or not--will be displayed on the timeline. To start this interaction, the mouse cursor is moved overan instrument label. A small eye will appear on the right side of the label that is open if the instrument is visible on thescore, and closed if the instrument is hidden. Click the left mouse button on the eye to toggle between the two options.

Zooming

To zoom in or out of the score, holdCtrl and scroll the mouse wheel up or down respectively.

Context menus

To bring up a context menu, right click on the timeline. There are three context menus found in these locations: metalabels, instrument labels, and meta rows.

Meta labels context menu

Upon clicking the right mouse button on the meta labels, a context menu appears that displays all possible meta labels aswell as two options: "Hide all" and "Show all." Next to each meta label in the menu, there is a check box that shows if themeta label is currently being shown on the timeline. To show or hide one of the meta labels, select the box of the metalabel in the context menu. Selecting "Hide all" will hide all meta labels except for the measures meta. Selecting "Show all"

227will display all meta labels.

Meta rows context menu

Clicking the right mouse button on the meta rows will display the same context menu as the meta labels.

Instrument context menu

Clicking the right mouse button on the instrument labels will display a context menu with the option to "Edit Instruments."Selecting this will bring you to the same dialog as Edit > Instruments... or pressing I for the shortcut.

Tools

A number of useful commands can be found in theTools menu.

Transpose

This opens the Transpose dialog with various options for transposing passages of music.

See Automatic transposition.

Explode

The explode command allows you to select a passage of musicin a single staff and split (explode) the chords into theirconstituent notes or voices as follows:

If the passage is all in voice 1, the top note of the chord is retained on the originating staff, while the lower notes are moved to subsequent staves. If the passage contains multiple voices, voice 1 notes are retained on the originating staff, while other voices are moved to subsequent staves. All exploded voices are now in voice 1.

To explode a section of the score:

1. Ensure that there are enough staves underneath the source staff to receive the exploded notes. Create extra staves if necessary using the Instruments dialog. 2. Chose one of two options: Select a range of measures in the source staff: this allows all notes to be exploded if there are enough staves available. Select a range of measures that includes both the source staff and also extends downwards to include one or more destination staves: This limits the number of exploded notes/voices to the number of selected staves. 3. Chose Tools→Explode.

Notes: (1) If the selection is all in voice 1, MuseScore will discard the lowest note(s) of any chord that contains more notesthan the number of staves in the selection. (2) If the selection is all in voice 1, and If a given chord has fewer notes thanthe number of destination staves, then notes will be duplicated as needed so that every staff receives a note. (3) Anyexisting music in the destination staves is overwritten. (4) If you select a partial measure, the explode command willautomatically expand it to a full measure.

Implode

The Implode command works in the opposite way to "explode":

With one staff selected, all notes in voices 1–4 are combined into voice 1. With multiple staves selected, the notes in the second staff are copied to the first available voice in thetop staff, the notes in the third staff are copied to the next available voice in thetop staff and so on.

Apply implode to a single staff

1. Select a range of measures in the desired staff.

2. Chose Tools→Implode.

All selected notes in the staff are now displayed in voice 1.

Apply implode to multiple staves

228 1. Ensure that there is only one voice in each staff. 2. Select a range of measures in the destination staff and extend this selection downwards to include the other staves to be imploded. 3. Chose Tools→Implode.

Voices

This allows you to swap the voices of a selected measure-range of notes. SeeExchange voices.

Measure

Join or split measures. See Measure operations: Split and join.

Remove selected range

This command is used to completely remove an element, or range of elements from the score.

To remove measures (including partial measures):

1. Select a range of notes/rests, or a range of measures;

2. Use one of the following methods: Press Ctrl+Delete . Select Tools→Remove selected range.

Note: If the selected range includes only part of a measure, the result will include a measure of smaller duration than theindicated Time Signature. This is indicated by a small - (minus) sign just above the system.

To join measures:

1. Select (i.e. click on) a barline;

2. Use one of the following methods: Press Ctrl+Delete . Select Tools→Remove selected range.

The following table is a comparative summary of the Delete and Remove selected Range_ commands when applied tosingle elements:

Note: To insert notes, see Insert.

Fill with slashes

1. Select one or more measures;

If a measure is empty the slashes are added to voice 1, full-sized and centered on the middle line of the staff:

Notes: (1) If there are already notes in a measure in the selection, the command will put the slashes into thefirst

229available empty voice. (2) Voice 2 slashes are full-sized and centered on the middle line of the staff; voices 3 slashesappear small and above the staff; voice 4 slashes are small and below the staff. (3) If a measure contains notes in all 4voices, voice 1 will be overwritten. (4) All slashes are set to not transpose or playback.

Toggle rhythmic slash notation

1. Select a range of notes or measures (Note: use the selection filter if you need to exclude certain voices); 2. From the menu, select Tools→Toggle Rhythmic Slash Notation .

The selected noteheads are changed to slash noteheads which do not transpose or playback.

Slash-notehead notes in voices one or two are fixed to the middle staff line; those invoices three or four are small("accent" notation) and fixed above or below the staff:

In percussion staves, notes in voices 3 and 4 are not converted to small slashes but to small notes above or below thestaff.

Respell pitches

Corrects accidentals to fit in with the current key signature. SeeAccidentals: Respell pitches.

Regroup Rhythms

This option corrects note ties, durations and beaming so that they are grouped according to standard music notationpractice. For example:

Before:

After:

Any notes that are tied and are the same length as a dotted note will be changed to the dotted note with two limitations. (i)Only the last note of a group of tied notes will have a single dot. Notes with more than one dot are not produced using thisoption. (ii) Dotted notes will not span from one group of beamed notes to another unless their duration is the same as allof the beam groups it covers. Any notes with more than one dot will be regrouped according to the above rules.

To apply:

1. Select the section of the score you want to reset. If nothing is selected, the operation will apply to the whole score; 2. Select Tools→Regroup Rhythms.

Note: This is an experimental feature and there are known bugs. Articulations and ornaments are deleted and somepitches respelled. Ties across barlines may be lost on UNDO.

Resequence rehearsal marks

230The Resequence Rehearsal Marks command allows you to re-order the numbering/lettering ofrehearsal marks if, forany reason, they have got out of sequence. For details see Automatically resequence rehearsal marks.

Unroll Repeats (version 3.1 and above)

This command creates a copy of the score (in a new tab), eliminates therepeat barlines and notates the repeat sections infull instead.

Copy lyrics to clipboard

This command copies all the lyrics of the score to the clipboard:

From the menu, select Tools→Copy Lyrics to Clipboard .

Image capture

Take a snapshot of a selected part of the document window. PNG, PDF and SVG formats are supported. SeeImagecapture.

Remove empty trailing measures

This automatically removes any blank measures at the end of the score.

Script recorder

To be added …

See also

Breaks and spacers

Rehearsal marks

SupportThis chapter describes how to find help using MuseScore: the best places to look, the best way to ask a question on theforums, and tips for reporting a bug.

Helping to improve translations

You can help translate the MuseScore software and documentation into your own language, as mentioned inDevelopment / Translating .

Software translation

1. Ask in the forum to improve translation

2. Connect to Transifex/MuseScore http://translate.musescore.org , which will redirect you to https://www.transifex.com/projects/p/musescore 3. Select the language and then the section you want to help with (MuseScore, Instruments, Start Center or tours) 4. Click on the "translate" button (the button text will depend on your language...) 5. Search for "strings" (informational meaning) you want to translate (you could filter "already translated items")

Here is a technical explanation: Continuous translation for MuseScore 2.0

Website and handbook translation

See Translation instructions

See also

Language Settings and Update Translation, Update Translation

Bug reports and Feature requests

231Before filing bug reports or feature requests in theIssue Tracker it is recommended first to post it in the relevantForum so others may help establish a bug as genuine, or provide ideas and second opinions for new features.Include a link to such discussion when creating the Issue.

Bug reports

Before posting in the issue tracker :

Try to reproduce the issue with the latest nightly . You may also view theversion history to check whether it has been fixed/implemented already.

Please include as much of the following information as you know and limit each issue to one report:

Version/revision of MuseScore you are using (e.g. version 3.0, revision 871c8ce ). Check Help → About... (Mac: MuseScore → About MuseScore... ). Operating system being used (e.g. Windows 7, macOS 10.12 or Ubuntu 14.04) Describe the precise steps that lead to the problem (where do you click, what keys do you press, what do you see, etc.). If you are not able to reproduce the problem with the steps, it is probably not worth reporting it as the developers will not be able to reproduce (and solve) it either. Remember that the goal of a bug report is not only to show the problem, but to allow others to reproduce it easily.

Please remember:

Attach the score that shows the problem —use the "File attachments" option at the bottom of the page, just above the Save and Preview buttons when you're typing your post.

Feature requests

When posting in the Issue Tracker :

Be brief, but describe the goal as precisely as you can

Describe the context in which the new feature is intended to work Suggest a specific workflow, if you can

External links

How to write a good bug report: step-by-step instructions

Revert to factory settings

MuseScore has the option to revert back to the standard built-in presets or "factory-settings". This can be necessary ifyour settings are corrupted. Warning: Reverting to factory settings removes any changes you have made to thepreferences, palettes, or window settings. This is not a commonly needed procedure; consult the forums first, as theremay be a way to solve your problem without resetting everything.

Via menu

If MuseScore still starts, it is possible to revert from within MuseScore.

Go to Help→Revert to Factory Settings . A warning dialog will appear:

Clicking Yes resets all MuseScore's settings as if the program was installed for the first time, and MuseScore willimmediately restart. No will safely cancel the revert.

232Via command line

If MuseScore does not start, you must run this process via thecommand line.

Instructions for Windows

1. If you have MuseScore open, you need to close it first (File→Quit)

2. Type ⊞ Win+R to open the Run dialog. Alternatively select "Start" using your mouse and type "run," then click the "Run" program. 3. Click Browse... 4. Look for MuseScore3.exe on your computer. The location may vary depending on your installation, but it is probably something similar to My Computer → Local Disk → Program Files → MuseScore 3 → bin → MuseScore3.exe

5. Click Open to leave the Browse dialog and return to the Run dialog. The following text (or something similar) should display in the Run dialog

The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces...) are in:

For the Windows Store version (Windows 10), these are pretty well hidden, search for them via Windows Explorer

Instructions for MacOS

1. If you have MuseScore open, you need to quit the application first (MuseScore→Quit) 2. Open Terminal (in Applications/Utilities, or via Spotlight search) and a session window should appear

3. Type (or copy/paste) the following command into your terminal line (include the '/' at the front):

/Applications/MuseScore\ 3.app/Contents/MacOS/mscore -F

This resets all MuseScore preferences to factory settings and immediately launches the MuseScore application. Note thatyou cannot quit the Terminal without quitting MuseScore. You can safely quit MuseScore, quit the Terminal, and thenreopen MuseScore in the normal fashion, ready to continue using.

For advanced users, the main MuseScore preference file is located at~/Library/Preferences/org.musescore.MuseScore3.plist.The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces...) are in ~/Library/Application\ Support/MuseScore/MuseScore3/ .

Instructions for Linux

The following is true for Ubuntu, and most likely all other Linux distributions and UNIX-style operating systems.

1. If you have MuseScore open, you need to quit the application first (File→Quit) 2. From the Ubuntu main menu, choose Applications→Accessories→Terminal . A Terminal session window should appear

3. Type, (or copy/paste) the following command into your terminal line (Ctrl+Shift+V to paste in Terminal):

mscore -F

233 Or, if you are using the AppImage version, you must first use thecd command to change directory to wherever you saved the AppImage. For example, if you saved it to your Desktop (and there is only one):

cd ~/Desktop ./MuseScore*.AppImage -F

This resets all MuseScore preferences to factory settings and immediately launches the MuseScore application. You cannow quit Terminal, and continue using MuseScore.

For advanced users, the main MuseScore preference file is located at${XDG_CONFIG_HOME:-~/.config}/MuseScore/MuseScore3.ini.The other preferences (palettes, session, shortcuts, workspaces, …) are in ${XDG_DATA_HOME:-~/.local/share}/MuseScore/MuseScore3/.

See also

Command line options

AppendixCommand line options

MSCORE(1) — General Commands Manual Page

NAME

mscore, MuseScore3 — MuseScore 3 sheet music editor

SYNOPSIS

You can launch MuseScore from the command line by typing

mscore [options] [filename …] (Mac and Linux/BSD/Unix)

and [filename] are optional. For this to work the MuseScore executable must be in%PATH% (Windows) resp. $PATH[options](Mac and Linux). If it is not, see Revert to factory settings for detailed instructions on how and where to find and executethe MuseScore executable from the command line on the various supported platforms.

MuseScore is a Free and Open Source WYSIWYG cross-platform multi-lingual music composition and notation software,released under the GNU General Public Licence (GPLv2).

Running mscore without any extra options launches the full graphical MuseScore program and opens any files specifiedon the command line.

The options are as follows:

-a | --use-audio driver

Use audio driver: one of jack, alsa, portaudio, pulse

-b | --bitrate bitrate

Set MP3 output bitrate in kbit/s

-c | --config-folder pathname

Override configuration and settings directory

-D | --monitor-resolution DPI

Specify monitor resolution (override autodetection)

-d | --debug

Start MuseScore in debug mode

-E | --install-extension extension file

Install an extension file; soundfonts are loaded by default unless-e is also specified

-e | --experimental

Enable experimental features, such as layers

-F | --factory-settings

Use only the standard built-in presets (“factory settings”) and delete user preferences; compare with the-R option (see also Revert to factory settings)

-f | --force

Ignore score corruption and version mismatch warnings in “converter mode”

235-h | --help

Display an overview of invocation instructions (doesn’t work on Windows)

-I | --dump-midi-in

Display all MIDI input on the console

-i | --load-icons

Load icons from the filesystem; useful if you want to edit the MuseScore icons and preview the changes

-j | --job file.json

Process a conversion job (see EXAMPLES below)

-L | --layout-debug

Start MuseScore in layout debug mode

-M | --midi-operations file

Specify MIDI import operations file (see EXAMPLES below)

-m | --no-midi

Disable MIDI input

-n | --new-score

Start with the New Score wizard regardless whether it’s enabled or disabled in the user preferences

-O | --dump-midi-out

Display all MIDI output on the console

-o | --export-to file

Export the given (or currently opened) file to the specified outputfile. The file type depends on the extension of the filename given. This option switches to “converter mode” and avoids the graphical user interface.

-P | --export-score-parts

When converting to PDF with the -o option, append each part’s pages to the created PDF file. If the score has no parts, all default parts will temporarily be generated automatically.

-p | --plugin name

Execute the named plugin

-R | --revert-settings

Use only the standard built-in presets (“factory settings”) but do not delete user preferences; compare with the-F option

-r | --image-resolution DPI

Set image resolution for conversion to PNG files. Default: 300 DPI (actually, the value of “Resolution” of the PNG option group in the Export tab of the preferences)

-S | --style style

Load a style file first; useful for use with the -o option

-s | --no-synthesizer

Disable the integrated software synthesizer

-T | --trim-image margin

236 Trim exported PNG and SVG images to remove whitespace surrounding the score. The specifiedmargin, in pixels, will be retained (use 0 for a tightly cropped image). When exporting to SVG, this option only works with single-page scores.

-t | --test-mode

Set test mode flag for all files

-v | --version

Display the name and version of the application without starting the graphical user interface (doesn’t work on Windows)

-w | --no-webview

Disable the web view component in the Start Centre

-x | --gui-scaling factor

Scale the score display and other GUI elements by the specifiedfactor; intended for use with high-resolution displays

--diff

Print a conditioned diff between the given scores

--long-version

Display the full name, version and git revision of the application without starting the graphical user interface (doesn’t work on Windows)

--no-fallback-font

Don’t use Bravura as fallback musical font

--raw-diff

Print a raw diff between the given scores

--run-test-script

Run script tests listed in the command line arguments

--score-media

Export all media (except MP3) for a given score as a single JSON document to stdout

--score-mp3

Generates an MP3 for the given score and exports it as a single JSON document to stdout

--score-parts-pdf

Generates parts data for the given score and exports it as a single JSON document to stdout

--template-mode

Save files in template mode (e.g. without page sizes)

MuseScore also supports the automatic Qt command line options .

Batch conversion job JSON format

The argument to the -j option must be the pathname of a file comprised of a valid JSON document honoring the followingspecification:

The top-level element must be a JSONArray, which may be empty.

Each array element must be a JSONObject with the following keys:

237 in:Value is the name of the input file (score to convert), as JSONString. plugin : Value is the filename of a plugin (with the.qml extension), which will be read from either the global or per- user plugin path and executed before the conversion output happens, as JSONString. Optional, but at least one of plugin and out must be given. out: Value is the conversion output target, as defined below. Optional, but at least one ofplugin and out must be given.

The conversion output target may be a filename (with extension, which decided the format to convert to), as JSONString.

The conversion output target may be a JSONArray of filenames as JSONString, as above, which will cause the score to be written to multiple output files (in multiple output formats) sequentially, without being closed, re-opened and re-processed in between.

If the conversion output target is a JSONArray, one or more of its elements may also be, each, a JSONArray of two JSONStrings (called first and second half in the following description). This will cause part extraction: for each such two-tuple, all extant parts of the score will be saved individually, with filenames being composed by concatenating the first half, the name (title) of the part, and the second half. The resulting string must be a valid filename (with extension, determining the output format). If a score has no parts (excerpts) defined, this will be silently ignored without error.

See below for an example.

ENVIRONMENT

238SKIP_LIBJACK Set this (the value does not matter) to skip initialization of the JACK Audio Connection Kit library, in case it causes trouble.XDG_CONFIG_HOME User configuration location; defaults to ~/.config if unset.XDG_DATA_HOME User data location; defaults to ~/.local/share if unset.

The per-user data (extensions, plugins, soundfonts, styles, templates) and files (images, scores) are normally installedinto subdirectories under ~/MuseScore3/ but may be changed in the configuration. Note that snapshot, alpha and betaversions use MuseScore3Development instead of MuseScore3 in all of these paths.

$XDG_CONFIG_HOME/MuseScore/MuseScore3.ini contains the user preferences, list of recently used files and their locations,window sizes and positions, etc. See above for development version paths.

$XDG_DATA_HOME/data/MuseScore/MuseScore3/ contains updated localization files downloaded from within the program, plugininformation, cached scores, credentials for the musescore.com community site, session information, synthesizer settings,custom key and time signatures and shortcuts. See above for development version paths.

EXAMPLES

Convert a score to PDF from the command line

mscore -o 'My Score.pdf' 'My Score.mscz'

Run a batch job converting multiple documents

mscore -j job.json

This requires the file job.json in the current working directory to have content similar to the following:

The last part of the job would, for example, cause files like “Piece with excerpts (part for Violin).pdf ” to be generated alongside theconductor’s partitura and a MIDI file with the full orchestra sound, whereas the equivalent part of the Reunion conversionwill be silently ignored (because the Reunion piece (a MuseScore demo) has no excerpts defined).

239MIDI import operations

The attached midi_import_options.xml is a sample MIDI import operations file for the -M option.

DIAGNOSTICS

The mscore utility exits 0 on success, and >0 if an error occurs.

SEE ALSO

fluidsynth(1), midicsv(1), timidity(1), qtoptions(7)

https://musescore.org/handbook

Online Handbook, full user manual

https://musescore.org/forum

Support Forum

https://musescore.org/en/node/278582

Reverting to factory settings (troubleshooting)

https://musescore.org/project/issues

Project Issue Tracker — Please check first to if the bug you’re encountering has already been reported. If you just need help with something, then please use the support forum instead.

MuseScore attempts to implement the following standards:

MusicXML 3.1 (score interchange format)

MuseScore was split off the MusE sequencer in 2002 and has since become the foremost Open Source notation software.

AUTHORS

MuseScore is developed by Werner Schweer and others.

This manual page was written by mirabilos <tg@debian.org >.

CAVEATS

The automatic Qt command line options are removed from the argument vector before the application has a chance atoption processing; this means that an invocation like mscore -S -reverse has no chance at working because the -reverse isremoved by Qt first.

BUGS

MuseScore does not honor /etc/papersize.

Probably some more; check the project’s bug tracker (cf. SEE ALSO).

240MuseScore — December 18, 2018

Keyboard shortcuts

Most keyboard shortcuts can be customized via the menu: select Edit→Preferences...→Shortcuts (Mac:MuseScore→Preferences...→Shortcuts). Below is a list of some of the initial shortcut settings.

Navigation

Beginning of score: Home (Mac: Fn+←)

Last page of score: End (Mac: Fn+→)Find (measure number, rehearsal mark, or pXX when XX is a page number):Ctrl+F (Mac: Cmd+F)

Staff text: Ctrl+T (Mac:Cmd+T)

Enter lyrics on a note: Ctrl+L (Mac: Cmd+L)

Previous lyric syllable: Shift+SpaceNext lyric syllable: if the current and the next syllables are separated by a '-': -, else SpaceMove lyric syllable left by 0.1sp: ←Move lyric syllable right by 0.1sp: →Move lyric syllable left by 1sp: Ctrl+← (Mac: Cmd+←)Move lyric syllable right by 1sp: Ctrl+→ (Mac: Cmd+→)Move lyric syllable left by 0.01sp: Alt+←Move lyric syllable right by 0.01sp: Alt+→

Toggle visibility on selected element(s): V

Known limitations of MuseScore 3.x

While all members of the development team did their best to make the software easy to use and bug-free, there are someknown issues and limitations in MuseScore 3.x.

Local time signatures

The local time signature feature, which allows you to have different time signatures in different staves at the same time, isvery limited. You can only add a local time signature to measures that are empty, and only if there are no linked parts.When adding notes to measures with local time signatures, you can enter notes normally via note input mode, but copyand paste does not work correctly and may lead to corruption or even crashes. The join and split commands are disabledfor measures with local time signatures.

Regroup Rhythms

The Regroup Rhythms command found under the Layout menu may have unintended side effects, including changing thespelling of pitches and deleting some elements like articulations, glissandos, tremolos, grace notes and, esp. on undo,ties. Use this tool with caution on limited selections, so that you can tell if any unwanted changes are made.

Tablature staff linked with standard staff

When entering multiple-note chords on a standard staff in alinked staff/tablature system, the notes should be entered inorder from the top (first) string to the bottom stringto ensure correct fret assignment.

This limitation does not apply if entering notes directly onto a tablature staff, or when using anunlinked staff/tablaturesystem.

Mixer

Changing settings in the mixer other than the sound doesn't mark the score 'dirty'. That means if you close a score youmay not get the warning "Save changes to the score before closing?". Changing mixer values are also not undoable.

Header & footer

There is no way to edit Header and Footer in a WYSIWYG manner. The fields in Format → Style → Header, Footer,Numbers are plain text. They can contain "HTML like" syntax, but the text style, layout, etc. can't be edited with aWYSIWYG editor.

Upgrade from MuseScore 1.x or 2.x

243How to upgrade MuseScore

Download and install the latest version from the download page as described at Installation. If you want to remove 1.xnor 2.x, check the installation page of the 1.x handbook.

Installing MuseScore 3 won't uninstall 1.x nor 2.x —all three versions can coexist peacefully and can even be used inparallel. So this isn't really an upgrade but an installation of a new and different program.

Opening 1.x or 2.x scores in MuseScore 3

MuseScore 3 significantly improved the typesetting quality to make scores attractive and easier to read. Improvementscover many items such as beam slope, stem height, layout of accidentals in chords and general note spacing. However,this means that sheet music made with MuseScore 1.x or 2.x looks slightly different from sheet music made with 3.x.

It also means that scores saved with 3.x won't open with 1.x nor 2.x.

To prevent you from accidentally overwriting your 1.x or 2.x scores, 3.x treats them as an import, which means:

The score gets marked as being modified, even if you haven't change anything On exiting MuseScore you're asked to save the score (as a result from the above) MuseScore uses the "Save As" dialog to save it, not the "Save" dialog MuseScore uses the score's title to create a default filename rather than taking the old filename

Relayout

If you did not manually adjust the layout of a 1.x or 2.x score, then MuseScore uses the 3.x typesetting engine to layoutthe score. If you did touch the layout of the 1.x or 2.x score, the individual adjustments you may have made should remainafter opening it in MuseScore 3.x, but due to slight changes in the surrounding layout they may still not appear correct incontext. If you wish to reset even manual adjustments to use the 3.x typesetting engine throughout, select the completescore with the shortcut Ctrl+A (Mac: Cmd+A) and reset the layout with Ctrl+R (Mac: Cmd+R).

Getting the sound from MuseScore 1.x

While the sound in 2.x/3.x has been much improved, you may still prefer the sound from MuseScore 1.x. In that case, youcan get the 1.x sound in 3.x by downloading the 1.3 SoundFont and add it in 3.x. You can do this in two steps:

Maple virtual cable is known to prevent MuseScore from closing properly.

KDE (Linux) window settings can cause the whole window to move when dragging a note.Changing the window settings of the operating system avoids the problem. Nitro PDF Creator may prevent MuseScore 2 from starting on Windows 10, if being used as the default printer. Same for Amyumi/Quickbooks PDF Printer, see here and also some cloud printing services, seehere . Creative Sound Blaster Z Series ASIO driver may prevent MuseScore 2 from starting on Windows 10. Untrusted Font Blocking policy prevents MuseScore 2 from starting (except in debug mode, i.e. using the -d option) on Windows 10. (Solution in the links provided here )

AVG Internet Security hangs MuseScore

If AVG prompts you, Allow MuseScore and check "Save my answer as a permanent rule and do not ask me next time."

If it doesn't prompt you anymore,

1. Open the AVG user interface (right-click on the AVG icon, close to your clock -> Open AVG User Interface 2. Click on Firewall 3. Click Advanced Settings 4. Click Applications 5. Find MSCORE.EXE in the list and double click it 6. Change Application Action to Allow for All

Font problem on macOS

MuseScore is known to display notes as square when some fonts are damaged on macOS.To troubleshoot this issue:

1. Go to Applications -> Font Book

2. Select a font and press ⌘+A to select them all 3. Go to File -> Validate Fonts 4. If any font is reported as damaged or with minor problems, select it and delete it 5. Restart MuseScore if necessary

In this forum article , a user believes to have found the font "Adobe Jenson Pro (ajenson)" to be the culprit, regardless ofnot being reported as broken, or problematic as per the above validation, and solved the problem by deleting that font, sothis is worth checking too.

Font problem on Linux

If the default desktop environment application font is set to bold, MuseScore will not display the notes properly.To troubleshoot this issue (gnome 2.*/MATE users):

1. Right-click on your desktop and select Change Desktop background

For GNOME 3/SHELL users

1. Open the shell and open "Advanced Settings"

2. Click on the Fonts option in the list 3. Set the default font to something non-bold 4. Restart MuseScore if necessary

Save As dialog empty on Linux

Some users reported that the Save As dialog is empty on Debian 6.0 and Lubuntu 10.10.To troubleshoot this issue:

1. Type the following in a terminal

which mscore

2. The command will answer with the path of mscore. Edit it with your preferred text editor and add the following line at the beginning

export QT_NO_GLIB=1

Launch MuseScore and the problem should be solved.

New features in MuseScore 3

MuseScore 3 includes a number of new and improved features. For a brief summary, see theRelease notes forMuseScore 3 . More details can be found in the summaries below and by referring to the relevant pages of the

245handbook.

Automatic Placement

MuseScore initially places elements in the score according to (a) the properties specified instyle defaults and (b) anymanual adjustments made. For elements that have automatic placement enabled, however, MuseScore will attempt toavoid collisions by moving one or more of them as needed.

See Automatic placement.

Default position

The default position for most elements is controlled by settings in Format → Style. You can either change the defaultthere, or, in the Inspector, apply a manual adjustment (see below) and then use the "Set as style" control (to the right ofthe value you wish to set).

The specific properties you can set vary by element type but include:

placement (whether the element appears above or below the staff by default) position above/below (specific positions when placed above or below) offset (same as position above/below, for which placement is the default) autoplace min distance (minimum distance from other elements when autoplace is enabled)

See Automatic placement.

Manual adjustments

Many elements can be placed either above or below the staff. To flip an element from above to below or vice versa, usethe "Placement" setting in the Inspector, or press the shortcut "X".

Manual adjustments to position can be performed by dragging or by changing the offsets in the Inspector. Neither methodwill allow you to position an element in a way that causes a collision, however. To take full control of the position of anelement, you can disable automatic placement for it.

See Automatic placement.

Disabling automatic placement

To disable automatic placement for an element, untick the "Automatic placement" box in the Inspector. The element willrevert to its default position, and it will no longer be considered when automatically placing other elements.

See Automatic placement.

Stacking order

The "Stacking order" setting in the Inspector controls which elements overlap which in the cases where they actually dooverlap and are not moved due to autoplacement.

See Automatic placement.

Text Formatting

Formatting of text is controlled by three factors:

The text style associated with the element sets the defaults for properties such as the font, alignment, and frame. Changes to these text properties can be applied to selected elements via the Inspector. Custom formatting can be applied to specific characters within the text using the text toolbar.

See Text basics, Text styles and properties.

Text Styles

Each text element has a text style associated with it. The default style for an element is determined by the type of theelement itself - staff text defaults to the Staff text style, dynamics to the Dynamics text style, etc. This text style determinesthe default font face, size, style (bold/italic/underline), alignment, and frame properties.

246You can change the defaults for any of these text styles usingFormat → Style → Text Styles. For instance, you can makerehearsal marks bigger, or change lyrics to be italicized. This will affect all existing elements using that style as well aselements you add later. Some elements also contain a limited set of text style controls in their own sections of the Format→ Style dialog (although this might not be the case in the final release). The settings are linked: you can change the fontsize for measure numbers in either Format → Style → Measure Numbers, or in Format → Style → Text Styles: MeasureNumber. The effect is the same: all measure numbers in the score will take on this size. You can also change the defaultsfor a text style using the Inspector; see Text Properties below.

For most text elements that you create directly (like staff text, rehearsal marks, and lyrics), you can apply a different textstyle using the Style control in the Inspector. This will cause them to display using that style instead of the "native" style forthe element. For example, you can select one or more staff text elements and give them the Tempo style to force them todisplay as if they were tempo markings.

See Text basics, Text styles and properties.

Text Properties

The text style controls the default properties for elements using that style, but you can override any of these properties forselected elements using the Inspector. For example, you can select a handful of staff text elements using Ctrl+click, thenuse the Inspector to make them larger. The Reset to Default button next to each property control returns it to the default.You can also click the Set as Style button to change the style to match. So another way to change the size of allmeasures numbers is to select one, change its size in the Inspector, then click Set as Style.

See Text basics, Text styles and properties.

Custom Formatting

Custom formatting is applied to text using the Text editing.

Staff Type Change

You can change various staff properties mid-score, including staff size, notehead scheme (e.g., for pitch namenoteheads), generation of time signatures, and others. The staff type change element is found on the Text palette(currently, but see #278205: Move Staff Type Change to another palette (it is not text) - it may move). Add it to themeasure where you want the change to occur, then use the Inspector to change properties of the staff type changeelement.

See Staff Type Change

Temporary and Cutaway Staves

To create a temporary staff that appears on certain systems only: first add the staff normally (Edit / Instruments), then addnotes, then right-click the staff, click Staff Properties, and set "Hide when empty" to "Always". This will cause the staff toshow only where needed even without needing to turn on "Hide empty staves" for the whole score (in Format / Style). Thedefault for "Hide when empty" is "Auto", meaning the staff will be hidden when empty if "Hide empty staves" is enabled.Additional values include "Never" (the staff will not be hidden when empty even if "Hide empty staves" is enabled) and"Instrument" (for instruments containing multiple staves, the staff is hidden only if all staves for that instrument are empty).

To create a cutaway staff in which only the measures containing notes are visible (for ossia or cutaway scores, forexample), right-click the staff, click Staff Properties, and enable the "Cutaway" option. This can be used independently of"Hide when empty" or "Hide empty staves".

System Dividers

System dividers are a set of short diagonal lines that are used to visually separate systems on a page. MuseScore canadd these to your score automatically. In Format → Style → System, you can enable dividers on the left, right, or both,and you can set their default position. You can also adjust the position of individual dividers in your score manually ormark them invisible (this currently does not survive saving).

Staff Spacing

As part of the automatic placement in MuseScore, staves are now spaced automatically, so you can set a comfortableminimum distance and depend on MuseScore to open up more space where needed. You can use staff spacers as in

247MuseScore 2 to increase distance between staves, but MuseScore 3 now also provides a way todecrease it—the "fixed"staff spacer, found on the Breaks & Spacers palette. Just add the spacer and adjust its height. This will also preventMuseScore from automatically adding more space to avoid collisions, allowing you to manage this yourself.

See Spacers.

Don't Break

Currently disabled

In addition to the system, page, and section breaks familiar from MuseScore 2, the "Breaks & Spacers" palette nowcontains a new "Don't Break" element. This allows you to force two measures to be kept together, for example, if there issome complex passage that spans the measures and you want to make sure they are adjacent. If both measures don't fiton a system, MuseScore moves them both to the next system. (currently, this leaves a "hole" at the end of the first staff -is this a bug or is there some purpose behind it?)

Parts from Voices

In addition to the ability to generateparts from the different instruments in your score, you can now also associate a partwith a specific staff within the instrument or even a specific voice within a specific staff. This allows you to combinemultiple parts (e.g., Flute 1 & 2) onto a single staff in the score while still generating separate parts.

The Parts dialog now contains two sections at the bottom, Instruments in Score and Instruments in Part. Once you havegenerated a part (or all parts) using the New and New All buttons, you can select any part at the top and use the controlsat the bottom to control not only what instrument is in the part, but also which staves and voices within the instrument areincluded.

To add an instrument to a part, select it from "Instruments in Score" and press "+". To remove an instrument from a part,select it from "Instruments in Part" and press "-". To customize the part at the staff or voice level, click the arrow next tothe instrument in "Instruments in Part" to expand the listing to show all staves and voices of the instrument. You canremove a staff by selecting it and pressing "-", or remove a voice by unchecking it.

Limitations: If you select only voice 1 for a given staff, then only the content in voice 1 for that staff will be included in thepart. Thus, in order to share flute 1 & 2 on the same staff, you will need to enter all notes onto both voices, even inpassages where they share content. You also cannot enter the two parts as chords in the passages where they sharerhythms.

Explode and Implode

Explode has been updated to allow separation of voices as well as notes. SeeExplode.

The implode tool (Tools / Implode) works in one of two modes.

With a single staff selected, the implode command merges notes in different voices into chords where possible (whennotes are on the same beat and have the same duration). This is the same as recent versions of MuseScore, althoughsome bugs have been fixed.

With multiple staves selected, the implode command combines the content of the first four non-empty voices (on anystaves) into multiple voices on the top selected staff. This is different from MuseScore 2, where notes would be combinedinto chords rather than using multiple voices, and thus required the rhythms to match. The MuseScore 3 approachpreserves the original rhythms even where they differ, and is intended to produce the expected results when combiningtwo different parts onto one staff for use with the parts from voices feature, or when reducing an open (four-stave) SATBscore into a closed (two-stave) version. To further merge the voices into chords where possible, simply run the commandagain.

See Tools.

Insert mode

You can insert and delete notes and have the measure automatically expand or contract to accommodate the change.This can be useful in creating unmetered music or in ordinary editing.

To insert a note before the currently-selected note, press Ctrl+Shift while adding the note normally. For example, in noteinput mode, Ctrl+Shift+click will insert a note of the currently-selected duration at that location. Ctrl+Shift+B will insert a B of

248the currently-selected duration before the note at the current cursor position. You can also switch to Insert mode using thedropdown menu next to the note input button on the toolbar. In this mode, all notes you add act as if you were pressingCtrl+Shift - they are inserted rather than replacing the existing notes or rests at that location.

To delete notes, you must be in normal (not note input) mode. Select either a single note or a range and press Ctrl+Del.

See Note input modes, Remove selected range (Tools)

Split/Join Measures

To split a measure before a given note, simply insert a barline from the palette at that point while holdingCtrl. For example,you can select the note, and Ctrl+double-click the barline in the palette, orCtrl+drag the barline to the note. You can alsouse Tools → Measure → Split Measure Before Selected Note/Rest.

To join two measures, Ctrl+Del the barline between them. You can also use the menu command Tools → Measure → JoinMeasures.

See Measure operations.

Timeline

The Timeline presents a graphical overview of your score. To access it, use View →Timeline (F12). The top portion of theTimeline shows the location of tempo, key, and time signature changes as well as rehearsal marks, repeats, and doublebarlines. The bottom portion shows the staves of your score, with non-empty measures highlighted. You can clickanywhere within this view to jump to the corresponding spot in the score.

See Timeline

Score Comparison Tool

The Score Comparison Tool (View / Score Comparison Tool) allows you to compare two versions of a score to find thedifferences between them. Select the two scores you want to compare and whether you want to compare the currentversion or the last saved version (note you can compare the current version of a score against the last saved version ofthe same score to see what you have changed since the last save), then click the Compare button. A list of differences ofdifferences will be displayed to the right. The score view will automatically change to Documents Side by Side, with thetwo scores you have selected displayed within. Double-click on a difference from the list and both score views willautomatically pan to show you the changed element, which will also be highlighted.

Normally you would want the default Intelligent comparison, which displays the differences in human-readable format (e.g."Measure 1: Note: property pitch changed from B4 to C5"). There is also a Raw mode to show the results according to theactual XML code.

See Score comparison.

Mixer

See Mixer.

Piano Roll Editor

See Piano roll editor (preliminary page).

Capo changes

Capo changes are now a property of staff text, and can be used to automatically change the pitch of all notes that followthem, up until another capo change.

See Capo playback.

Fretboard Diagrams

New UI. See Fretboard diagrams.

External links

249 Release notes for MuseScore 3.x Transitioning from version 2 to version 3

Glossary

The glossary is a work in progress—please help if you can. You can discuss this page in thedocumentation forum .

The list below is a glossary of frequently used terms in MuseScore as well as their meaning. The differences betweenAmerican English and British English are marked with "(AE)" and "(BE)", respectively.

Acciaccatura

A short →grace note which appears as a small note with a stroke through the stem. It is quickly executed and technically takes no value from its associated note.Accidental A sign appearing in front of a note that raises or lowers its pitch. The most common accidentals are → sharps, →flats or →naturals, but double sharps and double flats are also used. Also →koron, and →sori and other quarter tone accidentals. Accidentals affect all notes on the same →staff position only for the remainder of the measure in which they occur, but they can be canceled by another accidental. In notes tied across a →barline, the accidental continues across the →barline to the tied note, but not to later untied notes on the same →staff position in that measure.Ambitus Note (or vocal) range used in a →staff. Used particularly in Early MusicAnacrusis See →Pickup measure.Anchor The point of attachment to the score of objects such as Text and Lines: When the object is dragged, the anchor appears as small brown circle connected to the object by a dotted line. Depending on the object selected, its anchor may be attached to either (a) a note (e.g. fingering), (b) a staff line (e.g. staff text), or (c) a barline (e.g. repeats).Appoggiatura A long →grace note which takes value from its associated note. Its functions include: passing tone, anticipation, struck suspension, and escape tone.Arpeggio An arpeggio tells the performer to break up the chord into the constituent notes, playing them separately and one after the other. An arrow on the arpeggio indicates the direction in which the player should play the notes of the chord.

Bar (BE) See →measure.Barline Vertical line through a →staff, staves, or a full →system that separates →measures.Beam Notes with a duration of an →eighth or shorter either carry a →flag or a beam. Beams are used for grouping notes.BPM Beats Per Minute is the unit for measuring tempo. See →metronome markBreveBrevis A double whole note or breve is a note that has the duration of two whole notes.Caesura

250 A caesura (//) is a brief, silent pause. Time is not counted for this period, and music resumes when the director signals.Cent An interval equal to one hundredth of a semitone.Chord A group of two or more notes sounding together. To select a chord in MuseScore, pressShift and click on a note. In the Inspector, however, the word "Chord" only covers notes in the same voice as the selected note(s).Clef Sign at the beginning of a →staff, used to tell which are the musical noteson the lines and between the lines. Clefs are very useful for →transposition.Concert pitch Enables you to switch between concert pitch and transposing pitch (seeConcert pitch and Transposition).Crotchet (BE) See →Quarter note.Double Flat A double flat ( ) is a sign that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be lowered two semitones.Double Sharp A double sharp ( ) is a sign that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be raised two semitones.Demisemiquaver (BE) A thirty-second note.Duplet See →tuplet.Edit mode The program mode from which you can edit various score elements.Eighth note A note whose duration is an eighth of a whole note (semibreve). Same as a quaver (BE).Endings See →volta.Enharmonic notes Notes that sound the same pitch but are written differently. Example: G♯ and A♭ are enharmonic notes.Flag See →beam.Flat Sign (♭) that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be lowered one semitone.Grace note Grace notes appear as small notes in front of a normal-sized main note. See →acciaccatura and →appoggiatura.Grand Staff (AE)Great Stave (BE) A system of two or more staves, featuring treble and bass clefs, used to notate music for keyboard instruments and the harp.Half Note A note whose duration is half of a whole note (semibreve). Same as a minim (BE).Hemidemisemiquaver (BE) A sixty-fourth note.Interval The difference in pitch between two notes, expressed in terms of the scale degree (e.g. major second, minor third, perfect fifth etc.). See Degree (Music) (Wikipedia).Jump In MuseScore, "jumps" are notations such as "D.S. al Coda", found in the "Repeats & Jumps" palette.Key Signature Set of →sharps or →flats at the beginning of the →staves. It gives an idea about the tonality and avoids repeating those signs all along the →staff. A key signature with B flat means F major or D minor tonality.Koron An Iranian →accidental which lowers the pitch of a note by a quarter tone (in comparison to the →flat which lowers a note by a semitone). It is possible to use this accidental in a →key signature. See also →sori.Longa A longa is a quadruple whole note.Ledger Line Line(s) that are added above or below the staff.Measure (AE)

251 A segment of time defined by a given number of beats. Dividing music into measures provides regular reference points to pinpoint locations within a piece of music. Same as → bar (BE).Metronome mark Metronome marks are usually given by a note length equaling a certain playback speed in →BPM. In MuseScore, metronome marks are used in Tempo texts.Minim (BE) See →Half note.Natural A natural (♮) is a sign that cancels a previous alteration on notes of the same pitch.Normal mode The operating mode of MuseScore outside note input mode or edit mode: press Esc to enter it. In Normal mode you can navigate through the score, select and move elements, adjust Inspector properties, and alter the pitches of existing notes.Note input mode The program mode used for entering music notation.Operating SystemOS Underlying set of programs which set up a computer, enabling additional programs (such as MuseScore). Popular OSes are Microsoft Windows, macOS, and GNU/Linux. Not to be confused with a sheet music →system.Part Music to be played or sung by one or a group of musicians using the same instrument. In a string quartet, 1st part = Violin 1, 2nd part = Violin 2, 3rd part = Viola, 4th part = Cello, in a choir there might be parts for soprano, alto, tenor and bass. A part has one or more →staves (e.g. Piano has 2 staves, Organ can have 2 or 3 staves).Pickup Measure (also known as an Anacrusis or Upbeat) Incomplete first measure of a piece or a section of a piece of music. See Measure duration and Create new score: Pickup measure. Also Exclude from measure count.Quadruplet See →tuplet.Quarter note A note whose duration is a quarter of a whole note (semibreve). Same as a crotchet (BE).Quaver (BE) See →eighth note.Quintuplet See →tuplet.Respell Pitches Tries to guess the right accidentals for the whole score (see Accidentals).Rest Interval of silence of a specified duration.Re-pitch mode Allows you to rewrite an existing passage of music by changing the note pitches without altering the rhythm.Semibreve (BE) A whole note (AE). It lasts a whole measure in 4/4 time.Semiquaver (BE) A sixteenth note.Semihemidemisemiquaver (Quasihemidemisemiquaver) (BE) An hundred and twenty eighth note.Sextuplet See →tuplet.Slash chord See Slash chord (Wikipedia).Slash notation A form of music notation using slash marks placed on or above/below the staff to indicate the rhythm of an accompaniment: often found in association with chord symbols. There are two types: (1) Slash notation consists of a rhythm slash on each beat: the exact interpretation is left to the player (see Fill with slashes); (2) Rhythmic slash notation indicates the precise rhythm for the accompaniment (see Toggle rhythmic slash notation).SFZ A virtual instrument format supported by MuseScore (along with →SoundFonts). An SFZ library consists of one or more SFZ text files, each defining a particular instrument setup, and many audio sound samples.Sharp Sign (♯) that indicates that the pitch of a note has to be raised one semitone.Slur

252 A curved line over or under two or more notes, meaning that the notes will be played smooth and connected (legato). See also →tie.Sori An Iranian →accidental which raises the pitch of a note by a quarter tone (in comparison to the sharp which raises it by a semitone). It is possible to use this accidental in a →key signature. See also →koron.SoundFont A virtual instrument format supported by MuseScore (along with →SFZ). A SoundFont is a special type of file (extension .sf2, or .sf3 if compressed) containing sound samples of one or more musical instruments. In effect, a virtual synthesizer which acts as a sound source for MIDI files. MuseScore 2.2 comes with the SoundFont "MuseScore_General.sf3" pre-installed.Spatium (plural: Spatia) / Space / Staff Space / sp. (abbr./unit) The distance between the midpoints of two lines of a music staff (or one-quarter the size of the full five-line staff, assuming a hypothetical staff line thickness of 0). The sizes of most elements in the score are based on this setting (see Page settings).Staff (AE) / Staves (plural) A set of lines and spaces, each representing a pitch, on which music is written. In ancient music notation (before 11th century) the staff may have any number of lines.Staff Space See Spatium (above).Stave (BE) See Staff (above).Step-time input MuseScore's default note input mode, allowing you to enter music notation one note (or rest) at a time.System Set of staves to be read simultaneously in a score. See also →Operating System (OS).Tie

A curved line between two or more notes on the same pitch to indicate a single note of combined duration:

Quarter note + Tie + Quarter note = Half note

See also →slur.

Transposition

The act of moving the pitches of one or more notes up or down by a constantinterval. There may be several reasons for transposing a piece, for example:

1. The tune is too low or too high for a singer. In this case the whole orchestra will have to be transposed as well —easily done using MuseScore. 2. The part is written for a particular instrument but needs to be played by a different one. 3. The score is written for an orchestra and you want to hear what the individual instruments sound like. This requires changing the transposing instrument parts to concert pitch. 4. A darker or a more brilliant sound is desired.

Triplet See →tuplet.Tuplet A tuplet divides its next higher note value by a number of notes other than given by the time signature. For example a →triplet divides the next higher note value into three parts, rather than two. Tuplets may be: → triplets, →duplets, →quintuplets, and other.Upbeat See →pickup measure.Velocity The velocity property of a note controls how loudly the note is played. This usage of the term comes from MIDI synthesizers. On a keyboard instrument, it is the speed with which a key is pressed that controls its volume. The usual scale for velocity is 0 (silent) to 127 (maximum).Voice

253 Polyphonic instruments like Keyboards, Violins, or Drums need to write notes or chords of different duration at the same time on the same →staff. To write such things each horizontal succession of notes or chords has to be written on the staff independently. In MuseScore you can have up to 4 voices per staff. Not to be confused with vocalists, singing voices like soprano, alto, tenor and bass, which are better viewed as instruments.Volta In a repeated section of music, it is common for the last few measures of the section to differ. Markings called voltas are used to indicate how the section is to be ended each time. These markings are often referred to simply as →endings.